WO2020008960A1 - Decorative film, decoration method, method for producing decorative molded body, and decorative molded film - Google Patents

Decorative film, decoration method, method for producing decorative molded body, and decorative molded film Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020008960A1
WO2020008960A1 PCT/JP2019/025212 JP2019025212W WO2020008960A1 WO 2020008960 A1 WO2020008960 A1 WO 2020008960A1 JP 2019025212 W JP2019025212 W JP 2019025212W WO 2020008960 A1 WO2020008960 A1 WO 2020008960A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
layer
color change
change layer
resin
decorative
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2019/025212
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
威史 濱
隆志 有冨
漢那 慎一
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2020528811A priority Critical patent/JP7039701B2/en
Publication of WO2020008960A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020008960A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/18Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin characterised by the use of special additives
    • B32B27/20Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin characterised by the use of special additives using fillers, pigments, thixotroping agents
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/02Physical, chemical or physicochemical properties
    • B32B7/023Optical properties

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a decorative film, a decorative method, a method for manufacturing a decorative molded body, and a decorative molded film.
  • a decorative molded body in which a decorative film is arranged on the surface of a resin molded body to color the surface into a desired hue or a desired pattern is provided on the surface is known.
  • the decorative molded body is obtained, for example, by placing a decorative molded film in a mold in advance and injecting a base resin into the mold, and the decorative film is integrally formed on the surface of the resin molded body.
  • the decorative molded film refers to a film obtained by attaching a decorative film to a molding substrate.
  • performing the injection molding of the base resin after disposing the decorative molding film in the mold in advance may be generally referred to as film insert molding or simply insert molding.
  • Patent Document 1 in the in-mold transfer foil having a transfer layer on the release surface of the release substrate sheet, at least the transfer layer, A first transparent cross-linked cured resin layer, a printed picture layer, a second transparent cross-linked cured resin layer, a metallic gloss layer or a metallic print layer, and an adhesive layer, which are sequentially laminated, and the second transparent cross-linked type
  • the cured resin layer has a thickness of 20 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m.
  • Patent Document 2 discloses a decorative sheet in which at least a first base material layer, a release layer, a color changing layer B, and a second base material layer are sequentially stacked. Then, based on JIS B0601: 2001, the cut-off value is set to 0.8 mm, and the average interval Sm of irregularities when measuring the surface of the transfer layer when the decorative sheet is transferred to the transfer target is A decorative sheet having a thickness of 0.05 mm or more and 0.20 mm or less in at least a part of the surface of the transfer layer is described.
  • Patent Document 1 JP-A-2011-11376
  • Patent Document 2 JP-A-2017-47597
  • the problem to be solved by one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a decorative film having excellent color change.
  • a problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a decorating method using the decorating film and a method for manufacturing a decorating molded article.
  • a problem to be solved by yet another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a decorative molded film having excellent color change.
  • Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
  • the color change layer having a temporary support, a color layer, a color change layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, and a color change layer B in this order.
  • ⁇ 3> The decorative film according to ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>, wherein the thickness of the coloring layer is 3 ⁇ m or more.
  • ⁇ 4> The decorative film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the coloring layer contains a pigment as a coloring agent.
  • the colored layer is obtained by curing at least a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a urethane bond and at least one partial structure selected from the group consisting of alkyleneoxy groups having 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
  • ⁇ 6> The decorative film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the color change layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.25 or more.
  • ⁇ 7> The decorative film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, wherein the refractive index of the color change layer A is 1.6 or more.
  • ⁇ 8> The decorative film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, wherein the color changing layer A further contains zirconium oxide or titanium oxide.
  • ⁇ 9> The decorative film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8>, wherein the refractive index of the color change layer B is 1.4 or less.
  • ⁇ 10> The color changing layer B according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9>, wherein the color change layer B includes at least one selected from the group consisting of a siloxane resin having a void, a fluororesin, and hollow silica particles.
  • Decorative film ⁇ 11> The decorative film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>, wherein the color change layer A has a thickness of 5 ⁇ m or more, or the color change layer B has a thickness of 5 ⁇ m or more.
  • ⁇ 14> The decorative film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 13>, which is a decorative film for molding.
  • ⁇ 15> The step of peeling the temporary support from the decorative film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 14>, and the step of peeling off the decorative film from which the temporary support is peeled from the colored layer side.
  • a decorating method including a step of attaching to a material.
  • ⁇ 16> The decorating method according to ⁇ 15>, further comprising a step of forming an adhesive layer on a surface of the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off, from which the temporary support has been peeled off.
  • ⁇ 17> The decorating method according to ⁇ 15> or ⁇ 16>, wherein the substrate is a molding substrate.
  • ⁇ 18> a step of peeling the temporary support from the decorative film according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 14>, and molding the decorative film from which the temporary support is peeled from the colored layer side
  • a method for producing a decorative molded body comprising: a step of attaching to a substrate for molding; and a step of molding the substrate for molding to which the decorative film is attached.
  • the color change layer B having a color change layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a substrate, a color layer, a resin and a polymerizable compound, and a color change layer B in this order. Is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.1 or more.
  • a decorative film having excellent color changeability it is possible to provide a decorative film having excellent color changeability. Further, according to another embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a decorating method using the decorating film and a method of manufacturing a decorative molded body. According to still another embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a decorative molded film having excellent color changeability.
  • 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating an example of a decorative film according to the present disclosure. It is an outline sectional view showing other examples of the decoration film concerning this indication. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating an example of a decorative molded film according to the present disclosure.
  • the notation that does not indicate substituted or unsubstituted includes those having a substituent as well as those having no substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the “organic group” in the present specification refers to a group containing at least one carbon atom.
  • actinic ray or “radiation” in the present disclosure refers to, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet (EUV light: Extreme Ultraviolet), X-ray, and electron beam (EB: Electron). Beam) or the like.
  • light means actinic rays or radiation.
  • exposure in the present disclosure means, unless otherwise specified, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far-ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and EUV light, as well as electron beams and ion beams. Exposure with particle beams such as In the present disclosure, “to” is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as the lower limit and the upper limit.
  • (meth) acrylate represents acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth) acryl represents acryl and methacryl
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw), the number average molecular weight (Mn), and the degree of dispersion (also referred to as molecular weight distribution) (Mw / Mn) of the resin component are determined by a GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) apparatus (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation).
  • Detector Defined as a polystyrene-equivalent value obtained by a differential refractive index detector (Refractive Index Detector).
  • the amount of each component in the composition when there are a plurality of substances corresponding to each component in the composition, unless otherwise specified, the total amount of the plurality of corresponding substances present in the composition. means.
  • the term “step” is included in the term as well as an independent step as long as the intended purpose of the step is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other steps.
  • total solids refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the composition.
  • the “solid content” is a component excluding the solvent, and may be a solid or a liquid at 25 ° C., for example.
  • “% by mass” and “% by weight” have the same meaning
  • “parts by mass” and “parts by weight” have the same meaning.
  • a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure includes a temporary support, a colored layer, a color change layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, and a color change layer B in this order.
  • the color change layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.1 or more.
  • the application of the decorative film according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited, and specifically includes, for example, automobiles, home appliances, audio products, computers, displays, in-vehicle products, watches, accessories, optical components, doors, and window glasses. It can be used for decoration of building materials. Above all, the decorative film according to the present disclosure can be suitably used as a decorative film used for decoration of an automobile exterior.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure is excellent in three-dimensional moldability, so that it is suitable as a decorative film for molding, which is used for molding such as three-dimensional molding and insert molding. It is suitable.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure may be used as a decorative molded film by peeling off the temporary support, providing an adhesive layer described below, and attaching to a molding substrate described later, or forming the adhesive layer into a molded body. It is suitably used for applications in which a decorative molded article is formed by sticking to a molded article.
  • a decoration technique using a decoration film has come to be used in many cases from the viewpoints of imparting functionality and environmental load, and from any removable side.
  • new design properties are required from the spread of user preferences.
  • the present inventors have newly found a design in which a change in color (for example, tint, fine hue) (also referred to as “color changeability”) has been made, and have studied the introduction thereof as a decoration technique.
  • the color change may be not only a simple color change, but also a color change according to the viewing direction, and the larger the degree of the color change, the better the color change. .
  • the decorative film having the above-described structure has excellent color changeability.
  • a temporary support a colored layer, a color-changing layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, and a color-changing layer B in this order;
  • the refractive index difference between the color changing layer B and the color changing layer B is 0.1 or more, light reflection at the interface between the color changing layer A and the color changing layer B, light reflection at the surface of the color changing layer B,
  • the color layer is visually recognized through the color change layer A and the color change layer B due to optical interference due to reflection of light at the interface between the color change layer A and the color layer, the color change It is presumed that a special design such as a structural color is exhibited as an example.
  • the color change layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.1 or more.
  • the refractive index is a refractive index for light having a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
  • the refractive index of each layer in the present disclosure is determined by transmitting a single film of the color change layer A and the color change layer B formed on the alkali-free glass OA-10G (manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd.) with a spectrophotometer.
  • the refractive index of the color change layer A is 1.5 or more from the viewpoints of color change property and black tightness (reflection suppression effect by reflected light from the outside, for example, suppression of reflection of a fluorescent lamp). Is preferably 1.6 or more, more preferably 1.65 or more, and particularly preferably 1.70 or more. Further, the upper limit is preferably 2.3 or less, more preferably 1.9 or less.
  • the refractive index of the color change layer B is preferably 1.5 or less, more preferably less than 1.5, and more preferably 1.4 or less, from the viewpoints of color change and blackness. More preferably, it is particularly preferably 1.35 or less, most preferably 1.32 or less. Further, the lower limit is preferably 1.1 or more, more preferably 1.2 or more, and particularly preferably 1.28 or more.
  • the color changing layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color changing layer A by 0.1 or more, and is a layer having a refractive index lower by 0.15 or more from the viewpoint of color changeability and blackness. It is preferable that the layer has a refractive index of at least 0.2 or lower, more preferably a layer having a refractive index of at least 0.25 or lower, more preferably a layer having a refractive index of at least 0.25 or lower at 0.60 or lower. Is particularly preferred. Further, from the viewpoints of color change property, black tightness, and scratch resistance, the refractive index of the color change layer A is 1.6 or more, and the refractive index of the color change layer B is 1.5 or less.
  • the refractive index of the color changing layer A is 1.65 or more, and the refractive index of the color changing layer B is more preferably 1.4 or less. Further, from the viewpoint of color change property and blackness, the color change layer A has a refractive index of 1.5 or more, and the color change layer B has a refractive index of 1.4 or less. preferable.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure is the decorative film according to the present disclosure having a temporary support, a coloring layer, a color changing layer A, and a color changing layer B in this order.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 10 ⁇ m to 500 ⁇ m, more preferably from 20 ⁇ m to 300 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably from 50 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of releasability.
  • the thickness of the colored layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 3 ⁇ m or more, and more preferably 3 ⁇ m to 50 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of color change and three-dimensional moldability.
  • the thicknesses of the color change layer A and the color change layer B are each independently preferably from 50 nm to 50 ⁇ m, more preferably from 80 nm to 30 ⁇ m, and more preferably from 100 nm to 20 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of color change. Is particularly preferred.
  • the thickness of the color change layer A and the thickness of the color change layer B are different.
  • the thickness of the color change layer A is preferably 5 ⁇ m or more, or the thickness of the color change layer B is preferably 5 ⁇ m or more.
  • the thickness of the layer A is 5 ⁇ m or more, and the thickness of the color change layer B is 1 ⁇ m or less, or the thickness of the color change layer A is 1 ⁇ m or less, and the thickness of the color change layer B is 5 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the color change layer A is 7 ⁇ m or more, and the thickness of the color change layer B is 0.8 ⁇ m or less, or the thickness of the color change layer A is 0.1 ⁇ m or less. It is particularly preferred that the thickness be 8 ⁇ m or less, and the thickness of the color change layer B be 7 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100 ⁇ m or less. From the viewpoint of color changeability, the following combinations of the thickness and the refractive index of the color change layer A, the thickness and the refractive index of the color change layer B, and the thickness of the coloring layer are preferable.
  • the refractive index of the color change layer B is 1.5 or less (more preferably 1.45 or less, still more preferably 1.4 or less). .35 or less, and the refractive index of the color-changing layer A is 1.6 or more (more preferably 1.65 or more, still more preferably 1.7 or more).
  • the thickness of the color change layer B is 5 ⁇ m or more (more preferably, 10 ⁇ m or more), the thickness of the color change layer A is 1 ⁇ m or less, and It is preferable that the color layer has a thickness of 3 ⁇ m or more.
  • the thickness of the color change layer A is preferably 120 nm to 150 nm, 240 nm to 280 nm, 390 nm to 430 nm, or 530 nm to 560 nm in order to enhance blue reflection.
  • the refractive index of the color changing layer B is 1.4 or less, and the refractive index of the color changing layer A is 1.5 or more.
  • An embodiment is preferably mentioned.
  • the thickness of the color change layer B is 1 ⁇ m or less, the thickness of the color change layer A is 5 ⁇ m or more, and the color layer is 3 ⁇ m or more. Is preferred.
  • the film thickness of the color change layer B is preferably from 120 nm to 160 nm or from 320 nm to 370 nm to enhance blue reflection, and from 210 nm to 370 nm to enhance yellow reflection.
  • the thickness is 160 nm to 210 nm or 370 nm to 420 nm to enhance green reflection.
  • each layer is measured by cutting the decorative film in a direction perpendicular to the film surface, observing the cut surface with a scanning electron microscope (SEM) or an optical microscope, and measuring the thickness of the layer in that range.
  • SEM scanning electron microscope
  • the decorative film or, if it can be peeled, the peeled layer can be measured by a method of directly measuring with a vernier caliper, a film thickness meter or the like.
  • Temporal support As the temporary support, a known resin film is used without any particular limitation, and a film that has flexibility and does not cause significant deformation, shrinkage, or elongation under pressure or under pressure and heat is preferable. Can be used for As the temporary support, a resin film such as a cycloolefin copolymer film, a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, a polycarbonate film, and a polymethyl methacrylate film is preferable, and a polyethylene terephthalate film is more preferable. Further, an organic film with a release layer is more preferable in that the release property of the temporary support from the colored layer is excellent.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • an organic film with a release layer is more preferable in that the release property of the temporary support from the colored layer is excellent.
  • the temporary support used in the present disclosure has a total light transmittance of preferably 80% or more, and more preferably 90% or more, when exposure is performed from the temporary support side in an exposure step described later.
  • the total light transmittance can be measured by a spectrophotometer (for example, spectrophotometer UV-2100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation).
  • the temporary support preferably has a release layer for improving the releasability from the colored layer.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure preferably has a release layer between the temporary support and the colored layer in order to improve the releasability between the temporary support and the colored layer.
  • the release layer is not particularly limited, and a release layer known in the field of a transfer film or the like can be used. Examples of the release layer include a layer containing a thermoplastic resin, and a thermoplastic resin layer described in paragraph 0026 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 is preferably used as the release layer.
  • the colored layer is preferably formed on the release layer in the step of forming the colored layer.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure has a colored layer.
  • the color of the colored layer is not particularly limited, and may be a colored (not colorless and transparent) layer, but is preferably an opaque colored layer (preferably a colored layer having a total light transmittance of 10% or less).
  • the coloring layer may be of various colors such as black, gray, white, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and purple, but if it is a black coloring layer, the intensity of reflected light is small, and This is preferable because the change is more emphasized.
  • the colored layer preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound from the viewpoints of strength and scratch resistance.
  • the resin include a binder resin described below.
  • the colored layer may be a layer obtained by curing a polymerizable compound, may be a layer containing a polymerizable compound and a polymerization initiator, but storage stability, and, the colored layer and other layers From the viewpoint of adhesion, it is preferably a layer formed by curing a polymerizable compound, and has a urethane bond and at least one kind of partial structure selected from the group consisting of alkyleneoxy groups having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. It is more preferable that the layer is obtained by curing at least a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound.
  • the coloring layer preferably contains a coloring agent from the viewpoint of visibility, and more preferably contains a pigment as a coloring agent from the viewpoint of durability.
  • the colorant is not particularly limited, and a colorant having a desired hue can be appropriately selected and used.
  • the colorant include a pigment and a dye, and a pigment is preferable.
  • the pigment is preferably a particle-shaped pigment.
  • the pigment various conventionally known inorganic pigments and organic pigments can be used. Examples of the inorganic pigment include the inorganic pigments described in paragraphs 0015 and 0114 of JP-A-2005-7765.
  • Specific inorganic pigments include, for example, white pigments such as titanium dioxide, zinc oxide, lithopone, light calcium carbonate, white carbon, aluminum oxide, aluminum hydroxide, and barium sulfate; and carbon black, titanium black, and titanium carbon.
  • white pigments such as titanium dioxide, zinc oxide, lithopone, light calcium carbonate, white carbon, aluminum oxide, aluminum hydroxide, and barium sulfate
  • carbon black titanium black, and titanium carbon.
  • Iron oxide, and black pigments such as graphite.
  • known chromatic pigments such as iron oxide, barium yellow, cadmium red, and chrome yellow can be used.
  • organic pigment examples include the organic pigments described in paragraph 0093 of JP-A-2009-256572.
  • specific examples of the organic pigment include C.I. I. Red pigments such as C.I. Pigment Red 177, 179, 224, 242, 254, 255, 264; I. Pigment Yellow 138, 139, 150, 180, 185, etc .; I. Orange pigments such as C.I. Pigment Orange 36, 38 and 71; I. Green pigments such as CI Pigment Green 7, 36, 58; I. A blue pigment such as C.I. Pigment Blue 15: 6; I. Pigment Violet 23 and the like.
  • the pigment may include particles of a pigment having a light transmitting property and a light reflecting property (a so-called brilliant pigment).
  • a so-called brilliant pigment a pigment having a light transmitting property and a light reflecting property
  • Each of the coloring agents may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, particles of an inorganic pigment and particles of an organic pigment may be used in combination.
  • the content of the coloring agent in the coloring layer is, with respect to the total mass of the coloring layer, from the viewpoint of the development of the desired hue (for example, suppression of whitening) and the maintenance of the shape following property of the coloring layer to the mold. It is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 50% by mass, and still more preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass.
  • “whitening” in the present disclosure indicates that the colored layer changes so as to exhibit a whitish color like a matte feeling.
  • the colored layer used in the present disclosure preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated group and an epoxy group. From the viewpoint of curability and the like, an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable, and a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable.
  • a radical polymerizable group is preferable.
  • the polymerizable compound include bifunctional compounds having at least one partial structure selected from the group consisting of a urethane bond, a urea bond, an alkyleneoxy group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and a hydrocarbon group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • a trifunctional polymerizable compound (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific polymerizable compound”) is preferable, and a urethane bond and at least one partial structure selected from the group consisting of alkylene oxide groups having 2 or 3 carbon atoms are preferable.
  • a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having the same is more preferable.
  • the specific polymerizable compound may have a linking group between the partial structure and the polymerizable group, if necessary.
  • the specific polymerizable compound has at least two partial structures selected from the group consisting of a urethane bond, a urea bond, an alkyleneoxy group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and a hydrocarbon group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. You may have.
  • a urethane oligomer is preferable.
  • the nitrogen atom in the urethane bond may be disubstituted (one of the groups on the nitrogen atom is a hydrogen atom) or trisubstituted.
  • the specific polymerizable compound 1 preferably has a urethane resin chain.
  • a urethane (meth) acrylate oligomer is preferable, and examples thereof include an aliphatic urethane (meth) acrylate and an aromatic urethane (meth) acrylate.
  • an oligomer handbook supervised by Junji Furukawa, Chemical Daily Co., Ltd.
  • the urethane oligomer described herein is appropriately selected according to the purpose and used for forming a colored layer in this step. be able to.
  • the molecular weight of the urethane oligomer as the specific polymerizable compound 1 is preferably from 800 to 2,000, and more preferably from 1,000 to 2,000.
  • urethane (meth) acrylate oligomer which is the specific polymerizable compound 1
  • a commercially available product may be used.
  • Commercially available urethane (meth) acrylate oligomers include, for example, U-2PPA and UA-122P manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd .; CN964A85, CN964, CN959, CN962, CN963J85 manufactured by Sartomer Japan K.K. , CN965, CN982B88, CN981, CN983, CN991, CN991NS, CN996, CN996NS, CN9002, CN9007, CN9178, CN9893; Etc. (above, trade names).
  • “EBECRYL” is a registered trademark.
  • Examples of the bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a urea bond include a bifunctional or trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a urea bond.
  • the nitrogen atom in the urea bond may be disubstituted (one of the groups on the nitrogen atom is a hydrogen atom) or trisubstituted.
  • the specific polymerizable compound 2 preferably has a urea resin chain.
  • bifunctional or trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a urea bond include, for example, a synthetic product obtained by reacting an isocyanate compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group with an amine compound.
  • examples of the isocyanate compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group include 2-methacryloyloxyethyl isocyanate (a commercially available product, Karenz MOI (registered trademark) manufactured by Showa Denko KK), and isocyanate of 2-methacryloyloxyethyl isocyanate.
  • amine compound for example, an amine compound having two or more active hydrogen atoms, specifically, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, triethylamine, diisopropylamine, diethylenetriamine, triethylenetetramine, or the like can be used.
  • specific polymerizable compound 2 is not limited to a compound obtained by this method.
  • Specific examples of the specific polymerizable compound 2 include ethoxylated isocyanuric acid diacrylate, ethoxylated isocyanuric acid triacrylate, and ⁇ -caprolactone-modified tris (2-acryloxyethyl) isocyanurate.
  • ethoxylated isocyanuric acid diacrylate, ethoxylated isocyanuric acid triacrylate, and ⁇ -caprolactone-modified tris (2-acryloxyethyl) isocyanurate are also compounds having an ethyleneoxy group.
  • the specific polymerizable compound 2 is available as a commercial product.
  • Specific examples of commercially available products include, for example, NK esters A-9300 and A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd .; (The above is a trade name).
  • a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms (also referred to as “alkylene oxide group”) (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific polymerizable compound 3”) has one molecule. For example, it has one or more ethyleneoxy groups or propyleneoxy groups, and has two or three polymerizable groups at the molecular terminals.
  • the propyleneoxy group includes —CH 2 —CH 2 —CH 2 —O—, —CH 2 —CH (CH 3 ) O— or —CH (CH 3 ) —CH 2 O—, and —CH 2 —CH It is preferably (CH 3 ) O— or —CH (CH 3 ) —CH 2 O—.
  • examples of the polymerizable group in the specific polymerizable compound 3 include at least one ethylenically unsaturated group selected from the group consisting of an acryloyloxy group, an acryloyl group, a methacryloyloxy group, and a methacryloyl group.
  • Specific examples of the specific polymerizable compound 3 include ethylene glycol diacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, polyethylene glycol diacrylate, polyethylene glycol dimethacrylate, ethoxylated bisphenol A diacrylate, ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylate, and ethoxylated trimethylolpropane.
  • Examples include triacrylate, ethoxylated trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate, and ethoxylated glycerin trimethacrylate.
  • the number of ethyleneoxy groups or propyleneoxy groups contained in these compounds is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 9 to 40, and particularly preferably 15 to 30, from the viewpoint that the shape following property with respect to the mold becomes better.
  • the specific polymerizable compound 3 preferably has a polyethyleneoxy group or a polypropyleneoxy group having two or more ethyleneoxy groups or propyleneoxy groups.
  • the repeating number of the ethyleneoxy group or the propyleneoxy group in the polyethyleneoxy group or the polypropyleneoxy group is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more.
  • Specific polymerizable compound 3 is available as a commercial product.
  • Specific examples of commercially available products include, for example, NK esters A-200, A-400, A-600, A-1000, 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G, 9G, 14G, 23G manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a hydrocarbon group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific polymerizable compound 4”) has 6 to 12 carbon atoms and has a chain shape, a cyclic shape, It has any of the branched hydrocarbon groups and two or three polymerizable groups.
  • the hydrocarbon group in the specific polymerizable compound 4 is specifically a hydrocarbon chain having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, which may be linear or branched. Among them, a linear hydrocarbon group is preferable as the hydrocarbon group from the viewpoint that the shape following property with respect to the mold becomes better.
  • the polymerizable group includes, for example, at least one ethylenically unsaturated group selected from the group consisting of an acryloyloxy group, an acryloyl group, a methacryloyloxy group, and a methacryloyl group.
  • Specific examples of the specific polymerizable compound 4 include 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,7-heptanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,8-octanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9 -Nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,4-cyclohexanediol di (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, hydrogenated bisphenol A di- (Meth) acrylate and di (meth) acrylate of hydrogenated bisphenol F are mentioned.
  • tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) Acrylate and neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate are preferably used.
  • the polymerizable compound at least one portion selected from the group consisting of a urethane bond and an alkylene oxide group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of improving three-dimensional moldability, for example, by increasing flexibility upon heating. It is preferably a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a structure.
  • the coloring layer may contain other polymerizable compounds other than the specific polymerizable compound.
  • the other polymerizable compound any compound having the same polymerizable group as the specific polymerizable compound can be used without particular limitation.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably from 10% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the uncured colored layer, from the viewpoint of improving interlayer adhesion and imparting flexibility to the colored layer. More preferably, it is from 40% by mass to 40% by mass.
  • Each of the polymerizable compounds used in the present disclosure preferably has a molecular weight (weight average molecular weight when having a molecular weight distribution) of 200 to 3,000, more preferably 250 to 2,600, and more preferably 280 to 2,000. Particularly preferred is 2,200.
  • the coloring layer may contain a dispersant.
  • a dispersant By including a dispersant, the dispersibility of the pigment in the formed colored layer is improved, and the hue of the obtained decorative film can be made uniform.
  • the dispersant can be appropriately selected and used according to the type and shape of the pigment, and is preferably a polymer dispersant.
  • the polymer dispersant include a silicone polymer, an acrylic polymer, and a polyester polymer.
  • a silicone polymer such as a graft-type silicone polymer as the dispersant.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the dispersant is preferably from 1,000 to 5,000,000, more preferably from 2,000 to 3,000,000, and more preferably from 2,500 to 3,000,000. It is particularly preferred that there is. When the weight average molecular weight is 1,000 or more, the dispersibility of the pigment is further improved.
  • EFKA 4300 acrylic polymer dispersant
  • BASF Japan Homogenol L-18, Homogenol L-95, and Homogenol L-100 from Kao Corporation
  • “Homogenol”, “Solsperse”, and “DISPERBYK” are all registered trademarks.
  • the dispersant may contain only one kind or two or more kinds.
  • the content of the dispersant is preferably 1 part by mass to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the colorant.
  • the colored layer preferably contains a polymerization initiator, and more preferably contains a polymerizable compound and a polymerization initiator, in order to increase curing sensitivity and further improve interlayer adhesion.
  • a polymerization initiator a photopolymerization initiator is preferable from the viewpoint of increasing the sensitivity to exposure.
  • a polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0031 to 0042 of JP-A-2011-95716 and an oxime-based polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0064 to 0081 of JP-A-2015-014783 may be used. it can.
  • the photopolymerization initiator include, for example, 1- [4- (phenylthio)]-1,2-octanedione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (eg, IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE-01, BASF [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazol-3-yl] ethane-1-one-1- (O-acetyloxime) (for example, IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE- 02, manufactured by BASF), 2- (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone (for example, IRGACURE®) 379EG, manufactured by BASF), 2-methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropan-1-one (for example, IRGACURE (Registered trademark) 907, manufactured by BASF
  • an initiator other than a halogen-containing polymerization initiator such as a trichloromethyltriazine-based compound from the viewpoint of increasing the curing sensitivity, and ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone-based compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone-based compounds, oxime esters
  • a halogen-containing polymerization initiator such as a trichloromethyltriazine-based compound from the viewpoint of increasing the curing sensitivity
  • An oxime-based polymerization initiator such as a compound is more preferred.
  • the content of the polymerization initiator is preferably from 0.1 to 15 parts by mass, more preferably from 0.5 to 10 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
  • the colored layer preferably contains a binder resin from the viewpoint of reducing curing shrinkage of the colored layer.
  • the binder resin is not particularly limited, and a known resin can be appropriately selected.
  • the binder resin is preferably a transparent resin from the viewpoint of obtaining a desired hue, and specifically, a resin having a total light transmittance of 80% or more is preferable.
  • the total light transmittance can be measured by a spectrophotometer (for example, spectrophotometer UV-2100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation).
  • binder resin examples include an acrylic resin, a silicone resin, a polyester resin, a urethane resin, and an olefin resin. Above all, from the viewpoint of transparency, an acrylic resin, a silicone resin, or a polyester resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin or a silicone resin is more preferable. Further, from the viewpoint of heat resistance, a silicone resin is preferable.
  • acrylic resin refers to a resin containing a structural unit derived from an acrylic monomer having a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the (meth) acryloyl group is a concept including a methacryloyl group and an acryloyl group.
  • Acrylic resins include, for example, homopolymers of acrylic acid, homopolymers of methacrylic acid, homopolymers of acrylates, homopolymers of methacrylates, copolymers of acrylic acid with other monomers, methacrylic Copolymer of acid and other monomer, copolymer of acrylate and other monomer, copolymer of methacrylate and other monomer, urethane-modified copolymer having urethane skeleton in side chain Etc. are included.
  • acrylic resin examples include a glycidyl methacrylate adduct of cyclohexyl methacrylate / methyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, a random copolymer of benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid, a copolymer of allyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid, and benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid / hydroxyl.
  • Ethyl methacrylate copolymers and the like can be mentioned.
  • silicone resin a known silicone resin can be used.
  • a methyl straight silicone resin, a methylphenyl straight silicone resin, an acrylic resin-modified silicone resin, an ester resin-modified silicone resin, an epoxy resin-modified silicone resin, an alkyd resin Modified silicone resins and rubber-based silicone resins are mentioned.
  • methyl straight silicone resin, methylphenyl straight silicone resin, acrylic resin modified silicone resin, or rubber silicone resin is preferable, and methyl straight silicone resin, methylphenyl straight silicone resin, or rubber silicone is preferable.
  • Resins are more preferred.
  • a commercially available silicone resin may be used.
  • Examples of the commercially available products include KR-300, KR-311, KR-251, X-40-2406M, and KR-282 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • polyester resin examples include a linear saturated polyester synthesized from an aromatic dibasic acid or an ester-forming derivative thereof and a diol or an ester-forming derivative thereof.
  • linear saturated polyester examples include polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene isophthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, poly (1,4-cyclohexylene dimethylene terephthalate), and polyethylene-2,6-naphthalate.
  • the content of the binder resin is preferably 5% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 60% by mass, and more preferably 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the colored layer, from the viewpoint of reducing the curing shrinkage of the colored layer. % Or more and 60% by mass is more preferable. Further, the ratio of the total amount of the binder resin to the total amount of the polymerizable compound containing the specific polymerizable compound, that is, the total amount of the polymerizable compound / the total amount of the binder resin is preferably from 0.3 to 1.5, more preferably from 0.5 to 1 .0 is more preferred.
  • the coloring layer may contain additives in addition to the above components, if necessary.
  • additives known additives can be used. For example, paragraphs 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784, surfactants described in paragraphs 0060 to 0071 of JP-A-2009-237362, and Japanese Patent No. 4502784. And the other additives described in paragraphs 0058 to 0071 of JP-A-2000-310706.
  • the method for forming the colored layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably formed using a composition for forming a colored layer.
  • the composition for forming a colored layer contains a coloring agent, and preferably contains a coloring agent and an organic solvent. Further, the composition for forming a colored layer may further include other components described above.
  • the composition for forming a colored layer can be prepared, for example, by mixing an organic solvent and a component contained in the colored layer such as a coloring agent.
  • the content of the components contained in the colored layer is described as the content (% by mass) based on the total mass of the colored layer. , The content (% by mass) based on the total solid content of the composition for forming a colored layer.
  • the composition for forming a colored layer contains a pigment as a colorant
  • a pigment dispersion containing the pigment and the dispersant is prepared in advance, and the composition for forming a colored layer is prepared using the pigment dispersion. Is preferred from the viewpoint of further improving the uniform dispersibility of the pigment and the dispersion stability.
  • composition for forming a colored layer may be one prepared in advance by the above method, a commercially available product, or the like, or the composition for forming a colored layer may be prepared immediately before application. .
  • Organic solvent a commonly used organic solvent can be used without any particular limitation. Specific examples include organic solvents such as esters, ethers, ketones, and aromatic hydrocarbons. Also, methyl ethyl ketone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, cyclohexanone, cyclohexanol, methyl isobutyl ketone, ethyl lactate similar to Solvent described in paragraphs 0054 and 0055 of US Patent Application Publication No. 2005/282073. Methyl lactate and the like can also be suitably used as the organic solvent in the composition for forming a colored layer.
  • 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, diethylene glycol mono Ethyl ether acetate (ethyl carbitol acetate), diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate (butyl carbitol acetate), propylene glycol methyl ether acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, and the like are preferably used as the organic solvent in the composition for forming a colored layer.
  • organic solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the organic solvent is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass based on the total mass of the colored layer forming composition (coating solution). More preferred.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure has a color change layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, and the color change layer A is more than the color change layer B.
  • This is a layer having a refractive index higher than 0.1.
  • the color change layer A contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound as a binder, and preferably contains a resin from the viewpoint of scratch resistance.
  • the resin preferably contains at least one resin selected from the group consisting of a thermosetting resin and a photocurable resin.
  • the thermosetting resin include a siloxane resin, an epoxy resin, a phenol resin, a melamine resin, a urethane resin, an unsaturated / saturated polyester, and a polyimide.
  • the siloxane resin include a hydrolytic condensate of a bifunctional to tetrafunctional alkoxysilane.
  • crosslinked epoxy resin examples include a resin formed by polymerizing a compound having two or more polymerizable epoxy groups and a crosslinking agent.
  • examples of the photocurable resin include a crosslinked acrylic resin having a polymerizable group.
  • the crosslinked acrylic resin refers to a resin formed by polymerizing a compound having two or more polymerizable (meth) acrylate groups.
  • the polymerizable compound there is no particular limitation on the polymerizable compound, and known monomers and oligomers can be used. Further, as the polymerizable compound, the above-described polymerizable compound in the colored layer can be suitably used. Further, the polymerizable compound preferably contains at least a polyfunctional polymerizable compound from the viewpoint of scratch resistance.
  • the polyfunctional polymerizable compound is not particularly limited, and a known compound can be used. Preferred examples thereof include a polyfunctional acrylic monomer, a polyfunctional acrylic oligomer, and a polyfunctional urethane acrylate. Further, as the polymerizable compound, from the viewpoint of scratch resistance, an ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferable, and a (meth) acrylate compound is more preferable.
  • the color change layer A preferably contains, as a resin, a resin obtained by polymerizing a polymerizable compound, and more preferably contains a resin obtained by polymerizing at least a polyfunctional polymerizable compound.
  • a resin obtained by polymerizing at least a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is contained, and particularly preferably, a resin obtained by polymerizing at least a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compound is contained.
  • the color change layer A contains a polymerizable compound
  • the polymerization initiator those described above in the colored layer can be suitably used.
  • the color change layer A preferably has a hard coat property from the viewpoint of scratch resistance.
  • Examples of the material having a hard coat property include, for example, JP-A-2013-45045, JP-A-2013-43352, JP-A-2012-232524, JP-A-2012-128157, and JP-A-2011-131409.
  • the color change layer A may be a layer obtained by curing a polymerizable compound, or may be a layer containing a polymerizable compound and a polymerization initiator. From the viewpoint of adhesion between A and another layer, it is preferably a layer formed by curing a polymerizable compound, and at least one selected from the group consisting of a urethane bond and an alkyleneoxy group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. It is more preferable that the layer is formed by curing at least a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a partial structure.
  • the color change layer A preferably contains a filler, more preferably contains an inorganic filler, and contains high refractive index particles having a refractive index of 1.55 or more from the viewpoint of enhancing scratch resistance and a refractive index. Is particularly preferred. Further, the color change layer A preferably contains a metal oxide, and more preferably contains zirconium oxide (zirconia) or titanium oxide (titania), from the viewpoint of increasing the scratch resistance and the refractive index.
  • the shape of the filler is not particularly limited, but is preferably particulate.
  • the high-refractive-index particles having a refractive index of 1.55 or more have a volume average particle diameter of 2 nm or more and 100 nm or less from the viewpoints of aggregation suppression and layer transparency. Is preferable, and it is more preferable that the volume average particle diameter is 5 nm or more and 80 nm or less, and it is particularly preferable that the volume average particle diameter is 10 nm or more and 60 nm or less.
  • the fillers can be used alone or in combination of two or more. The volume average particle diameter of the filler and the particles is measured by a Coulter counter.
  • the high refractive index particles from the viewpoint of enhancing scratch resistance and refractive index, oxidation of at least one element selected from the group consisting of aluminum, zirconium, titanium, zinc, germanium, indium, tin, antimony, and cerium. Particles, more preferably zirconium oxide particles or titanium oxide particles. Among them, zirconium oxide particles having no photocatalytic action are preferable from the viewpoint of light resistance, but it is also preferable to use titanium oxide particles having suppressed photocatalytic action.
  • the refractive index of the high refractive index particles is preferably from 1.60 to 3.00, more preferably from 1.80 to 2.90, and more preferably from 1.90 to 2.80, from the viewpoint of increasing the refractive index. Is particularly preferred.
  • the dispersant further contains a crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group.
  • the crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group include an ethylenically unsaturated group capable of undergoing an addition reaction and a polymerization reaction by a radical species (for example, a (meth) acryloyl group, an allyl group, a styryl group, a vinyloxy group, etc.), a cationic polymerizable group (epoxy Group, oxatanyl group, vinyloxy group, etc.), polycondensation-reactive group (hydrolyzable silyl group, N-methylol group), and the like, and is preferably a functional group having an ethylenically unsaturated group.
  • a dispersant having an anionic group for dispersing the high refractive index particles, particularly for dispersing the inorganic particles containing TiO 2 as a main component, and more preferably to have an anionic group and a crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group.
  • a dispersant having the crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group in a side chain is particularly preferred.
  • Specific examples of the crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group include the above-described functional groups.
  • anionic group a group having an acidic proton such as a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group (sulfo group), a phosphoric acid group (phosphono group), a sulfonamide group, or a salt thereof is preferable, and a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group, A phosphate group or a salt thereof is more preferred, and a carboxy group or a phosphate group is particularly preferred.
  • the number of anionic groups contained in the dispersant per molecule may be plural in one molecule, but is preferably 2 or more on average, more preferably 5 or more, Particularly preferably, the number is 10 or more. Further, a plurality of kinds of anionic groups may be contained in one molecule of the dispersant.
  • the composition of the anionic group-containing monomer unit is preferably in the range of 10 ⁇ 4 mol% to 100 mol% of all monomer units, and more preferably 1 mol% to 50 mol%. More preferably, it is particularly preferably from 5 mol% to 20 mol%.
  • the number of crosslinkable or polymerizable functional groups contained in the dispersant per molecule is preferably 2 or more on average, more preferably 5 or more, and particularly preferably 10 or more.
  • a plurality of types of crosslinkable or polymerizable functional groups contained in the dispersant may be contained in one molecule.
  • examples of the monomer unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain include a poly-1,2-butadiene and poly-1,2-isoprene structure or an ester or amide of (meth) acrylic acid.
  • a repeating unit having a specific residue (R group of —COOR or —CONHR) bonded thereto can be used.
  • R 21 to R 23 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group, Represents an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group, R 21 and R 22 or R 23 may be bonded to each other to form a ring, n represents an integer of 1 to 10, and X represents a dicyclopentadienyl residue Represents.).
  • a free radical (a polymerization initiation radical or a growing radical in the course of polymerization of the polymerizable compound) is added to the unsaturated bond group, and directly between the molecules or the polymerizable compound. Is subjected to addition polymerization through a polymerization chain of the above, and a crosslink is formed between the molecules to be cured.
  • atoms in the molecule eg, a hydrogen atom on a carbon atom adjacent to the unsaturated bonding group
  • free radicals in the molecule are abstracted by free radicals to form polymer radicals, which are linked together to form crosslinks between the molecules.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dispersant having an anionic group and a crosslinked or polymerizable functional group and having the crosslinked or polymerizable functional group in a side chain is not particularly limited, but is 1,000 or more. It is preferably 2,000 to 1,000,000, more preferably 5,000 to 200,000, and particularly preferably 10,000 to 100,000.
  • the content unit of the crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group may constitute all the monomer units other than the anionic group-containing monomer unit, but is preferably 5 mol% to 50 mol% of all the monomer units, and particularly preferably. Is 5 mol% to 30 mol%.
  • the dispersant may be a copolymer with a suitable monomer other than a monomer having a crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group or an anionic group.
  • the copolymerization component is not particularly limited, but is selected from various viewpoints such as dispersion stability, compatibility with other monomer components, and strength of a formed film. Preferred examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, t-butyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, and styrene.
  • the form of the dispersant is not particularly limited, but is preferably a block copolymer or a random copolymer, and particularly preferably a random copolymer from the viewpoint of cost and ease of synthesis.
  • the content of the dispersant in the color change layer A is preferably from 1% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably from 5% by mass to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the high refractive index particles, It is particularly preferred that the content is 5% by mass to 20% by mass. Further, two or more dispersants may be used in combination. JP-A-2007-293313 has a detailed description of a dispersant that is preferably used.
  • the method of dispersing the high refractive index particles in the dispersion medium is not particularly limited, but can be dispersed using a disperser.
  • the dispersing machine include a sand grinder mill (eg, a bead mill with pins), a high-speed impeller mill, a pebble mill, a roller mill, an attritor, a colloid mill, and the like. Among them, a sand grinder mill or a high-speed impeller mill is particularly preferable.
  • a preliminary dispersion process may be performed. Examples of the disperser used for the preliminary dispersion treatment include a ball mill, a three-roll mill, a kneader, and an extruder.
  • the high refractive index particles are preferably miniaturized as much as possible in the dispersion medium, and the preferred volume average particle size is in accordance with the above-mentioned particle size.
  • the content of the filler in the color change layer A can be appropriately adjusted according to the desired strength and refractive index.
  • the color change layer A It is preferably from 10% by mass to 95% by mass, more preferably from 15% by mass to 90% by mass, still more preferably from 20% by mass to 85% by mass, and more preferably from 30% by mass to 85% by mass with respect to the total mass. Particularly preferred is 80% by mass.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure has a color changing layer B, and the color changing layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color changing layer A by 0.1 or more.
  • the color change layer B is preferably a layer having antireflection ability from the viewpoint of color change and blackness.
  • the color change layer B is preferably a thicker layer than the color change layer A from the viewpoint of scratch resistance.
  • the material of the color change layer B is not particularly limited, but preferably contains the following components.
  • the color change layer B preferably contains, as a binder, at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, more preferably contains a resin, and more preferably contains a resin. It is more preferable to include an acidic compound.
  • the resin preferably contains at least one resin selected from the group consisting of a thermosetting resin and a photocurable resin.
  • the thermosetting resin and the photocurable resin those described above for the color change layer A can be suitably used by appropriately selecting the refractive index.
  • the polymerizable compound and known monomers and oligomers can be used.
  • the above-described polymerizable compound in the colored layer can be suitably used.
  • the polymerizable compound those described above in the color change layer A can be suitably used by appropriately selecting the refractive index before or after curing.
  • the color change layer B contains a polymerizable compound, it is preferable to contain a polymerization initiator from the viewpoint of curability and scratch resistance.
  • the polymerization initiator those described above in the colored layer can be suitably used.
  • the color change layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.1 or more, it is preferable to include a material having a low refractive index.
  • the color change layer B preferably has a refractive index of 1.5 or less, more preferably 1.4 or less, from the viewpoint of color change.
  • the color change layer B preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a siloxane resin having a void, a fluororesin, and low refractive index particles. More preferably, it contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a siloxane resin, a fluororesin, and hollow silica particles.
  • the fluororesin is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include those described in paragraphs 0076 to 0106 of JP-A-2009-217258 and paragraphs 0083 to 0127 of JP-A-2007-229999.
  • the fluorine resin include an alkyl fluoride resin in which hydrogen in an olefin is replaced with fluorine, and include polytetrafluoroethylene, polychlorotrifluoroethylene, polyvinylidene fluoride, polyvinyl fluoride, perfluoroalkoxyalkane, and perfluoroalkyl resin.
  • Examples include a copolymer such as ethylene propene and ethylene tetrafluoroethylene, or a fluororesin dispersion which is copolymerized with an emulsifier or a component for enhancing affinity with water and dispersed in water.
  • a fluororesin include Lumiflon and Obrigato manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd., Zeffle and Neoflon manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd., Teflon manufactured by DuPont, and Kynar Kayner.
  • a compound having at least one of a polymerizable functional group and a crosslinkable functional group and containing a fluorine atom may be used, and a perfluoroalkyl (meth) acrylate, a vinyl fluoride monomer, a vinylidene fluoride, Examples include radically polymerizable monomers such as monomers, and cationically polymerizable monomers such as perfluorooxetane.
  • Such a fluorine compound examples include LINC3A manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., Optool manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd., Opstar manufactured by Arakawa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., and tetrafluorooxetane manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd. .
  • the low refractive index particles, preferably particles having a refractive index of 1.45 or less are not particularly limited, and examples thereof include those described in paragraphs 0075 to 0103 of JP-A-2009-217258.
  • low refractive index particles include hollow particles using inorganic oxide particles such as silica and resin particles such as acrylic, porous particles having a porous structure on the particle surface, and fluoride particles having a low refractive index of the material itself. And the like.
  • hollow particles include hollow silica particles such as Sluria manufactured by JGC Catalysts & Chemicals Co., Ltd., Sirinax manufactured by Nittetsu Mining Co., Ltd., Techpolymer MBX and SBX manufactured by Sekisui Plastics Co., Ltd.
  • Examples include multi-hollow resin particles.
  • Specific examples of the porous particles include Light Star manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • specific examples of the fluoride particles include magnesium fluoride nanoparticles manufactured by Rare Metal Materials Laboratory Co., Ltd.
  • siloxane resin having the voids hollow particles or core-shell particles are used in terms of suppressing deterioration such as thermal deformation of the resin base material and in that the above-described openings are not easily formed on the surface of the color change layer B. It is preferable to use a method of forming closed voids in a matrix containing a siloxane resin using Examples of a method for forming the color-changing layer B by applying a composition containing hollow particles include, for example, the methods described in paragraphs 0028 to 0029 of JP-A-2009-103808 or the paragraphs of JP-A-2008-262187. The methods described in 0030 to 0031 can be applied. In particular, a method of forming the color change layer B using core-shell particles is preferable because the adjustment of the void diameter and the void ratio is easy.
  • the color-change layer B in the present disclosure is not limited to the one formed by this method.
  • the color change layer B forming coating liquid preferably contains core-shell particles.
  • the core-shell particles preferably contain an organic solvent as a core material from the viewpoint of easy formation of closed voids.
  • 20% by mass or more of the organic solvent is a nonpolar solvent having a boiling point of 90 ° C or more and 350 ° C or less.
  • the “boiling point” in the present disclosure is a boiling point at 1 atm (101,325 Pa).
  • the “non-polar solvent” in the present disclosure refers to a solvent having a solubility in water of 0.1% by mass or less at 20 ° C. and a relative dielectric constant of 10 or less.
  • nonpolar solvent having a boiling point of 90 ° C. or more and 350 ° C. or less examples include a hydrocarbon compound, a fluorinated hydrocarbon compound, and a silicone compound. From the viewpoint of the light transmittance and haze of the color change layer B, hydrocarbon It is preferably a compound.
  • the material of the shell of the core-shell particles is not particularly limited, but preferably contains a polysiloxane compound from the viewpoints of strength, light transmittance, and haze of the color change layer B. More preferably, the composition contains a hydrolysis condensate, more preferably 50% by mass or more based on the total mass of the shell, of the siloxane compound represented by Formula 1 described below, and more preferably 50% by mass or more. It is particularly preferred to be composed of a hydrolyzed condensate of the represented siloxane compound.
  • the volume average particle diameter of the core-shell particles is preferably from 0.05 ⁇ m to 1.5 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.08 ⁇ m to 1.0 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of the strength, light transmittance and haze of the color change layer B. More preferably, it is 0.1 ⁇ m to 0.6 ⁇ m, particularly preferably 0.1 ⁇ m to 0.4 ⁇ m.
  • the volume average particle size of the particles in the present disclosure is measured using a laser diffraction / scattering type particle size distribution measuring device (model number: Microtrac MT3300EXII, manufactured by Microtrac Bell Co., Ltd.).
  • the average particle diameter means a median diameter.
  • the coefficient of variation of the particle diameter of the core-shell particles in the present disclosure is calculated by dividing the standard deviation in the volume distribution of the particle diameter measured in the above measurement by the median diameter.
  • the size (maximum diameter) of the core in the core-shell particles is preferably 40 nm or more, more preferably 40 nm to 1,000 nm, and more preferably 60 nm, from the viewpoints of the strength, light transmittance and haze of the color change layer B. It is particularly preferred that the thickness be up to 600 nm.
  • the size (maximum diameter) of the core in the core-shell particles can be measured by the same method as the method for measuring the diameter of the void in the color change layer B described above.
  • the coating liquid for forming the color change layer B preferably contains a siloxane compound.
  • a siloxane compound at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a siloxane compound represented by the following formula 1 and a hydrolyzed condensate of the siloxane compound represented by the following formula 1 (hereinafter referred to as a specific siloxane compound) Is also referred to as a compound).
  • R 1 , R 2, and R 3 each independently represent an alkyl group or an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R 4 s are present, an alkyl group, a vinyl group, Or vinyl, epoxy, vinylphenyl, (meth) acryloxy, (meth) acrylamide, amino, isocyanurate, ureido, mercapto, sulfide, polyoxyalkyl, carboxy and quaternary Represents an alkyl group having a group selected from the group consisting of quaternary ammonium groups, m represents an integer of 0 to 2, and n represents an integer of 1 to 20.
  • the hydrolysis-condensation product of the siloxane compound represented by the formula 1 means that the siloxane compound represented by the formula 1 and at least a part of the substituents on the silicon atoms in the siloxane compound represented by the formula 1 are hydrolyzed.
  • the alkyl group or alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in R 1 , R 2 and R 3 in the formula 1 may have a ring structure, whether it is linear or branched. Is also good.
  • the alkyl group or alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group from the viewpoint of the strength, light transmittance and haze of the protective layer.
  • alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an n-pentyl group, an n-hexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group. And preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.
  • R 4 is preferably an alkyl group independently from the viewpoint of the strength, light transmittance, and haze of the protective layer, and is more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. preferable.
  • the carbon number of R 4 in Formula 1 is preferably 1 to 40, more preferably 1 to 20, and particularly preferably 1 to 8.
  • M in the formula 1 is preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 2 from the viewpoint of the strength, light transmittance and haze of the protective layer.
  • N in Formula 1 is preferably an integer of 2 to 20 from the viewpoints of strength, light transmittance, and haze of the protective layer.
  • Examples of the specific siloxane compound include KBE-04, KBE-13, KBE-22, KBE-1003, KBM-303, KBE-403, KBM-1403, KBE-503, KBM- manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. 5103, KBE-903, KBE-9103P, KBE-585, KBE-803, KBE-846, KR-500, KR-515, KR-516, KR-517, KR-518, X-12-1135, X- 12-1126, X-12-1131; Dynasylan 4150 manufactured by Evonik Japan Co., Ltd .; MKC silicate MS51, MS56, MS57, MS56S manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation; ethyl silicate 28, N-propyl silicate manufactured by Colcoat Co., Ltd. , N-butyl silicate, SS-101; .
  • the coating liquid for forming the color change layer B preferably contains a surfactant.
  • the surfactant include a nonionic surfactant, an anionic surfactant that is an ionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an amphoteric surfactant, and the like, and any of them can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
  • the coating solution for forming the color-change layer B may contain other components in addition to the components described above, depending on the purpose.
  • known additives can be used, and examples thereof include an antistatic agent, a siloxane compound condensation catalyst, and a preservative.
  • the coating liquid for forming the color change layer B may contain an antistatic agent.
  • the antistatic agent is used for imparting antistatic properties to the color change layer B, thereby suppressing the attachment of contaminants.
  • the antistatic agent for imparting antistatic properties is not particularly limited.
  • As the antistatic agent used in the present disclosure at least one selected from the group consisting of metal oxide particles, metal nanoparticles, conductive polymers, and ionic liquids can be preferably used. Two or more antistatic agents may be used in combination.
  • the metal oxide particles need to be added in a relatively large amount in order to provide antistatic properties. Can be enhanced.
  • the metal oxide particles are not particularly limited, and examples thereof include tin oxide particles, antimony-doped tin oxide particles, tin-doped indium oxide particles, zinc oxide particles, and silica particles.
  • the metal oxide particles have a large refractive index, and if the particle size is large, there is a concern that light transmittance may be reduced due to scattering of transmitted light, so the average primary particle size of the metal oxide particles is preferably 100 nm or less, It is more preferably at most 30 nm, particularly preferably at most 30 nm. Further, the lower limit is preferably 2 nm or more.
  • the shape of the particles is not particularly limited, and may be spherical, plate-like, or needle-like.
  • the average primary particle diameter of the metal oxide particles can be determined from a photograph obtained by observing the dispersed particles with a transmission electron microscope. From the image of the photograph, the projected area of the particles is determined, and the equivalent circle diameter is determined therefrom, which is defined as the average particle diameter (average primary particle diameter).
  • the average primary particle diameter in the present specification uses a value obtained by measuring the projected area of 300 or more particles and calculating the equivalent circle diameter.
  • the shape of the metal oxide particles is not spherical, it may be determined by using another method, for example, a dynamic light scattering method.
  • the antistatic agent may be contained alone or in combination of two or more in the coating solution for forming the color change layer B.
  • the content of the antistatic agent is preferably 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the coating solution for forming the color changing layer B. Is more preferable, and particularly preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the content is preferably 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 20% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the coating solution for forming the color change layer B. More preferably, it is particularly preferably 10% by mass or less.
  • the coating liquid for forming the color change layer B preferably contains a condensation catalyst that promotes the condensation of the siloxane compound.
  • the coating solution for forming the color-change layer B contains a condensation catalyst, the color-change layer B having more excellent durability can be formed.
  • the method of preparing the coating solution for forming the color-change layer B is not particularly limited.
  • an organic solvent, a surfactant, and water are mixed, the organic solvent is dispersed in water, and a specific siloxane compound is added.
  • a method for producing a core-shell particle by forming a shell layer on the surface of an organic solvent dispersed and partially hydrolyzed and condensed to produce a coating solution for forming a color-change layer B, a core-shell particle containing an organic solvent as a core material,
  • a method of mixing and producing a siloxane compound, a surfactant, and water is exemplified.
  • the coating liquid for forming the color-change layer B described above is applied on the lower layer of the color-change layer B and dried to form the color-change layer B.
  • the method for applying the coating solution for forming the color-change layer B is not particularly limited, and any of known coating methods such as spray coating, brush coating, roller coating, bar coating, and dip coating can be applied. .
  • the lower layer to which the coating solution for forming the color-change layer B is applied is subjected to corona discharge treatment, glow treatment, atmospheric pressure plasma treatment, flame treatment, and ultraviolet irradiation treatment. Etc. may be applied.
  • Drying of the coating solution for forming the color change layer B may be performed at room temperature (25 ° C.) or may be performed by heating.
  • a coating liquid that sufficiently volatilizes the organic solvent contained in the coating liquid for forming the color-change layer B and forms a void a void is formed, and the light-transmitting property of the color-change layer B and the viewpoint of suppressing coloration
  • the heating is performed at 40 ° C. to 120 ° C.
  • the heating time is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes.
  • the color changing layer B may be formed using a coating liquid for forming.
  • the hollow particles it is preferable to use hollow silica particles containing silica as a main component, since the refractive index is 1.5 or less.
  • the hollow silica particles include hollow particles described in JP-A-2013-237593, WO 2007/060884, and the like.
  • the hollow silica particles may be unmodified hollow silica particles or hollow silica particles having a modified surface.
  • the hollow particles are subjected to physical discharge treatment such as plasma discharge treatment and corona discharge treatment in the coating liquid for forming the color change layer B in order to stabilize the dispersion or to increase the affinity and binding with the siloxane resin.
  • physical discharge treatment such as plasma discharge treatment and corona discharge treatment in the coating liquid for forming the color change layer B in order to stabilize the dispersion or to increase the affinity and binding with the siloxane resin.
  • Surface treatment a chemical surface treatment with a surfactant, a coupling agent, or the like.
  • the porosity of the color change layer B is preferably from 10% to 80%, more preferably from 15% to 75%, and more preferably from 20% to 55%, from the viewpoint of light transmittance and scratch resistance. Is particularly preferred.
  • the diameter of the voids in the color change layer B (hereinafter, also referred to as “void diameter”) is preferably 25 nm or more, and more preferably 30 nm or more, from the viewpoints of strength, light transmittance, and haze.
  • the upper limit of the void diameter is preferably 80 nm or less, more preferably 70 nm or less, from the viewpoint of scratch resistance.
  • the method for measuring the pore diameter and the porosity of the color change layer B is as follows.
  • the decorative film provided with the color changing layer B is cut in a direction perpendicular to the film surface, and the cut surface is observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM) to measure the void diameter and the porosity.
  • SEM scanning electron microscope
  • the circle equivalent diameter is calculated for each of the 200 arbitrarily selected voids, and the average value is defined as the void diameter.
  • the porosity of the cut surface was determined by using an image processing software (ImageJ) for the SEM image of the cut surface (magnification: 50,000 times), using the image processing software (ImageJ) to determine the image of the void portion and the matrix portion (that is, the portion other than the void containing the siloxane resin). Processing (binarization) is performed and separated, and the ratio of the void portion is calculated to be the porosity. In addition, when there is no anisotropy in the diameter of the void, the porosity is obtained as a volume fraction of the void in the siloxane resin.
  • ImageJ image processing software
  • ImageJ image processing software
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure preferably further includes a resin layer between the colored layer and the color changing layer A, from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion between the colored layer and the color changing layer A.
  • the resin layer is preferably a layer containing a different type of resin from the color change layer A.
  • the resin layer is preferably a transparent resin layer from the viewpoint of color change, and more preferably a layer made of a transparent film.
  • the transparent film is preferably a film obtained by forming a transparent resin.
  • a transparent resin Specifically, polyethylene terephthalate (PET) resin, polyethylene naphthalate (PEN) resin, acrylic resin, polycarbonate (PC) resin, triacetyl
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • PEN polyethylene naphthalate
  • PC polycarbonate
  • TAC triacetyl
  • a resin film containing a resin such as cellulose (TAC) or cycloolefin polymer (COP) may be used.
  • an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or a polyethylene terephthalate resin is used in an amount of 60% by mass or more (more preferably 80% by mass or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more based on all resin components contained in the transparent film). Is preferably 100% by mass).
  • a resin film containing 60% by mass or more (more preferably 80% by mass or more, more preferably 100% by mass) of an acrylic resin with respect to all resin components contained in the transparent film is more preferable.
  • the thickness of the resin layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m.
  • commercially available products may be used as the transparent film.
  • the commercially available products include Acryprene (registered trademark) HBS010 (acrylic resin film, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) and Technoroy (registered trademark) S001G (acrylic resin film, Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.), C000 (polycarbonate resin film, Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.), C001 (acrylic resin / polycarbonate resin laminated film, Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • the method for forming the resin layer is not particularly limited, but preferably includes a method of laminating a transparent film on the colored layer.
  • a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator capable of further increasing the productivity can be used.
  • the laminator is preferably provided with an optional heatable roller such as a rubber roller, and can be pressurized and heated. By the heating from the laminator, at least one of the transparent film and the colored layer is partially melted, and the adhesion between the colored layer and the transparent film can be further increased.
  • the temperature at the time of laminating the transparent film may be determined according to the material of the transparent film, the melting temperature of the colored layer, and the like, but it is preferable that the temperature of the transparent film be 60 ° C. to 150 ° C. , 65 ° C to 130 ° C, more preferably 70 ° C to 100 ° C.
  • a linear pressure of 60 N / cm to 200 N / cm between the transparent film and the coloring layer it is preferable to apply a linear pressure of 70 N / cm to 160 N / cm. It is particularly preferable to apply a linear pressure of 80 N / cm to 120 N / cm.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure may have a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer between the temporary support and the colored layer from the viewpoint of adhesiveness to a substrate to which the decorative film is to be attached. Further, as described later, before the attachment to the base material, the temporary support is peeled off, and the adhesive layer is formed on the outermost layer on the colored layer side of the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off. It may be formed and then attached to a substrate.
  • the material of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose. For example, a layer containing a known adhesive or adhesive can be used.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive examples include an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive, a rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, and a silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive examples include acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesives described in Chapter 2 of "Evaluation of Properties of Release Papers / Release Films and Pressure-Sensitive Tapes and Their Control Techniques", Jikken, 2004, Chapter 2, and ultraviolet (UV) curable adhesives. Agents, silicone adhesives and the like.
  • the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive refers to a pressure-sensitive adhesive containing a polymer of a (meth) acrylic monomer ((meth) acrylic polymer). When an adhesive is included, a tackifier may be further included.
  • the adhesive examples include a urethane resin adhesive, a polyester adhesive, an acrylic resin adhesive, an ethylene vinyl acetate resin adhesive, a polyvinyl alcohol adhesive, a polyamide adhesive, and a silicone adhesive. From the viewpoint of higher adhesive strength, urethane resin adhesives or silicone adhesives are preferred.
  • the method for forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, and a method of laminating the protective film on which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is formed so that the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the colored layer are in contact with each other, and laminating the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer alone so as to be in contact with the colored layer. And a method of applying a composition containing the above-mentioned pressure-sensitive adhesive or adhesive on the colored layer.
  • a laminating method or a coating method a method similar to the above-described method of laminating a transparent film or a method of applying a composition for forming a colored layer is preferably exemplified.
  • the thickness of the adhesive layer in the decorative film is preferably 5 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of coexistence of adhesive strength and handleability.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure may have other layers other than those described above.
  • the other layers include a reflective layer, a self-healing layer, an antistatic layer, an antifouling layer, an anti-electromagnetic wave layer, and a conductive layer, which are known layers in the decorative film.
  • Other layers in the decorative film according to the present disclosure can be formed by a known method. For example, there is a method in which a composition containing the components contained in these layers (layer-forming composition) is applied in the form of a layer and dried.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure may have a cover film as an outermost layer on the color change layer B side for the purpose of preventing contamination and the like.
  • the cover film is not particularly limited as long as it has flexibility and good releasability, and examples thereof include resin films such as polyethylene films.
  • the method for attaching the cover film is not particularly limited, and includes a known attaching method, such as a method of laminating the cover film on the color changing layer B.
  • the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure has a base material, a coloring layer, a color changing layer A, and a color changing layer B in this order, and the color changing layer B has a refractive index higher than that of the color changing layer A. It is a layer lower than 0.1.
  • the coloring layer, the color changing layer A, and the color changing layer B in the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure are the same as the coloring layer, the color changing layer A, and the color changing layer B in the decorative film according to the present disclosure. Yes, and the preferred embodiment is also the same. Further, the preferred embodiments of the other layers are also the same.
  • the substrate in the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure is preferably a film substrate.
  • the substrate in the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure is a molding substrate.
  • the substrate is the same as the substrate described below, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • a method of attaching to a base material in a decorative method according to the present disclosure described later can be referred to.
  • the decorating method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a decorating method using the decorative film according to the present disclosure, and a step of peeling the temporary support from the decorative film according to the present disclosure, Affixing the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off to the substrate from the colored layer side, preferably the surface from which the temporary support has been peeled off in the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off. It is more preferable that the method further includes a step of forming an adhesive layer.
  • the decorative article according to the present disclosure is a decorative article using the decorative film according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a decorative article obtained by the decorating method according to the present disclosure.
  • the decorating method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of peeling the temporary support from the decorative film according to the present disclosure.
  • the peeling method is not particularly limited, and may be a known method. For example, there is a method in which a part of the temporary support is gripped and peeled using a base material such as a finger or tweezers.
  • the decorating method according to the present disclosure includes a step of forming an adhesive layer on a surface of the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled, from which the temporary support has been peeled (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “step of forming an adhesive layer”). ) Is preferable.
  • the method for forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is the same as the method for forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer described above, and the preferable embodiments are also the same.
  • the decorating method according to the present disclosure includes a step of sticking the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off to the substrate from the colored layer side (also simply referred to as a “step of sticking to the substrate”). Is preferred.
  • the decorative film from which the temporary support has been removed may be attached to the outermost layer on the colored layer side and the base material. What is necessary is just to stick the said coloring layer or the said adhesive layer of a decorative film, and a base material.
  • the substrate is not particularly limited, and a desired substrate can be used. Specific examples include automobiles, home appliances, audio products, computers, displays, in-vehicle products, watches, accessories, optical components, doors, window glasses, building materials, and the like. Above all, the decorating method according to the present disclosure can be suitably used as a decorating method for an automobile exterior.
  • a molding substrate can be suitably used as the substrate.
  • a conventionally known substrate used for molding such as three-dimensional molding and insert molding can be used without any particular limitation. It should be done.
  • the shape and material of the molding substrate are not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected as desired. However, from the viewpoint of ease of insert molding, a film substrate is preferable.
  • the molding substrate examples include polyethylene terephthalate (PET) resin, polyethylene naphthalate (PEN) resin, acrylic resin, polycarbonate (PC) resin, triacetyl cellulose (TAC), cycloolefin polymer (COP), A resin film containing a resin such as an acrylonitrile / butadiene / styrene copolymer resin (ABS resin) is exemplified.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • PEN polyethylene naphthalate
  • acrylic resin acrylic resin
  • PC polycarbonate
  • TAC triacetyl cellulose
  • COP cycloolefin polymer
  • ABS resin acrylonitrile / butadiene / styrene copolymer
  • the base material for molding is acrylonitrile / butadiene / styrene in an amount of 60% by mass or more based on all resin components contained in the base material for molding because of its suitability for three-dimensional molding and insert molding, and particularly excellent followability to a mold.
  • a resin film containing a copolymer resin (ABS resin) is preferable.
  • the content of the ABS resin with respect to all the resin components contained in the molding base is more preferably 80% by mass or more, and may be 100% by mass (that is, all of the resin components are the ABS resin).
  • the molding base material may contain additives other than the above-described resins, if necessary.
  • additives include mineral oils, hydrocarbons, fatty acids, alcohols, fatty acid esters, fatty acid amides, metal soaps, natural waxes, lubricants such as silicones, magnesium hydroxide, inorganic flame retardants such as aluminum hydroxide, Organic or inorganic fillers such as halogen-based, phosphorus-based organic flame retardants, metal powder, talc, calcium carbonate, potassium titanate, glass fiber, carbon fiber, and wood powder, antioxidants, UV inhibitors, lubricants, Additives such as dispersants, coupling agents, foaming agents, coloring agents, etc., polyolefin resins, polyester resins, polyacetal resins, polyamide resins, polyphenylene ether resins, and the like, and engineering plastics other than the above-mentioned resins.
  • a commercially available product may be used as the molding substrate.
  • Commercially available products include, for example, ABS film (manufactured by Okamoto Corporation), ABS sheet (manufactured by Sekisui Molding Industry Co., Ltd.), Teflex (registered trademark) series (PET film, manufactured by Teijin Film Solutions Ltd.), Lumirror (Registered trademark) easy-molding type (PET film, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) and the like.
  • the thickness of the molding substrate is determined according to the use of the decorative molded article to be produced, suitability for insert molding, handleability of the sheet, etc., and is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 ⁇ m to 800 ⁇ m, and more preferably 150 ⁇ m to 600 ⁇ m. More preferred.
  • -Pasting method There is no particular limitation on the method of attaching the substrate to the substrate, and a known method can be used. For example, a method of laminating a base material on the adhesive layer after peeling off the protective film of the adhesive layer as needed is mentioned.
  • the laminating method is not particularly limited, and for example, the same method as the above-described method for laminating a transparent film is used.
  • a step of exposing the colored layer a step of exposing the color changing layer A, or a step of exposing the color changing layer B (also referred to as an “exposure step”) ).
  • the colored layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the colored layer contains a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator
  • the decorative film after the protective film is peeled off so that the substrate and the adhesive layer are in contact with each other. Exposure may be performed after sticking. According to the above method, the adhesive strength between the base material and the decorative film after peeling off the protective film is excellent.
  • the timing of performing the exposure step is not particularly limited, even before the step of peeling the temporary support, before the step of forming the adhesive layer. Even if it is before the step of attaching to the substrate, it may be after the step of attaching to the substrate, from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion between the layers, the temporary support It is preferably performed before the peeling step. Further, from the viewpoint of the laminating property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the exposure step is preferably performed before the step of forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Further, from the viewpoint of ease of molding when ductility at the time of heating is required, it is preferable that the exposure step is performed after the step of sticking to the substrate.
  • the exposure in the exposure step is preferably performed from the color change layer B side from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion between the color change layer A or the resin layer and the cured colored layer.
  • the exposure may be performed from the temporary support side, or may be performed from both the color change layer B side and the temporary support side. May be performed.
  • the total light transmittance of the temporary support is preferably 80% or more, more preferably 90% or more.
  • exposure When exposure is performed after the step of peeling the temporary support, exposure may be performed from the side of the temporary support that has been peeled, or exposure may be performed from both sides of the color change layer B and the temporary support that has been peeled. May be performed.
  • an adhesive layer may be formed on the separated temporary support, or a protective film may be further provided.
  • the total light transmittance of the protective film is preferably 80% or more, and more preferably 90% or more.
  • the exposure method for example, the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
  • a light source capable of irradiating light for example, 365 nm, 405 nm
  • a wavelength range capable of curing a polymerizable compound can be appropriately selected and used.
  • an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp and the like can be mentioned.
  • the exposure amount is not particularly limited and may be appropriately set, is preferably 5mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 2,000mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 1,000mJ / cm 2 .
  • this step for example, it is not necessary that all the polymerizable compounds in the colored layer react, and the unpolymerized polymerizable compound and the polymer of the polymerizable compound coexist in the colored layer after exposure. It may be in the state of doing.
  • the state in which the specific polymerizable compound and the polymer of the specific polymerizable compound coexist, and the decorative molded body obtained after the molding is further exposed, whereby the interlayer adhesiveness (with the colored layer and The adhesion between the color change layer B and the adhesion between the colored layer and the substrate may be further improved.
  • the color change layer A and the color change layer B may be further improved.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating an example of a layer configuration of a decorative film according to the present disclosure.
  • the decorative film 20 has a colored layer 24 on the temporary support 22 and a resin layer 26 on the colored layer 24.
  • the resin layer 26 has a color change layer A28 and a color change layer B30 on the surface opposite to the color layer 24.
  • the resin layer 26 is an arbitrary layer and does not need to be included in the decorative film 20.
  • the above-described release layer may be provided between the temporary support 22 and the colored layer 24.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating another example of the decorative film according to the present disclosure.
  • the decorative film 10 has a coloring layer 24 on the adhesive layer 12, and has a resin layer 26, a color changing layer A28, and a color changing layer B30 on the coloring layer 24 in this order.
  • the protective film 14 is provided on the side of the adhesive layer 12 opposite to the colored layer 24.
  • the adhesive layer 12, the protective film 14, and the resin layer 26 are optional layers, and need not be included in the decorative film 10.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating an example of the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure.
  • the decorative molded film 40 has an adhesive layer 12, a colored layer 24, a resin layer 26, a color change layer A28, and a color change layer B30 in this order on the base material 16 for molding.
  • the adhesive layer 12 and the resin layer 26 are optional layers, and need not be included in the decorative molding film 40.
  • the method for manufacturing a decorative molded body according to the present disclosure may be any method for manufacturing a decorative molded body by performing decoration and molding using the decorative film according to the present disclosure.
  • the decorative molded body according to the present disclosure is a decorative film obtained by using the decorative film according to the present disclosure or the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure. It is preferably manufactured.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure is also excellent in three-dimensional moldability, it can be suitably used for the production of a decorative molded body.
  • three-dimensional molding and at least one selected from the group consisting of insert molding It is particularly suitable when producing a decorative molded body by molding.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure can be made into a decorative molded body by sticking to a molded body after molding.
  • the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure is also excellent in three-dimensional moldability, and thus can be suitably used for the production of a decorative molded body.
  • the molded body is a resin
  • it is particularly suitable, for example, when manufacturing a decorative molded body by at least one type of molding selected from the group consisting of three-dimensional molding and insert molding.
  • the molded body is a material that does not melt, such as metal
  • it is particularly suitable when a decorative molded body is manufactured by three-dimensional molding.
  • the decorative film according to the present disclosure during the production of the decorative molded body, it is possible to apply it to a mold having a more complicated shape, a smaller shape, and the like, thereby expanding the range of applications of the decorative molded body. it can.
  • a method for producing a decorative molded body will be described in detail by taking insert molding as an example.
  • the decorative molded body is obtained by, for example, disposing a decorative molded film in a mold in advance and injection molding a base resin in the mold.
  • a decorative molded body in which the decorative film is integrated with the surface of the resin molded body is obtained.
  • an adhesive layer may be provided between the decorative molded film and the resin molded body.
  • a known adhesive can be appropriately selected. Specifically, for example, an adhesive containing a vinyl chloride / vinyl acetate copolymer and an acrylic resin may be used. A commercially available adhesive may be used, and examples of the commercially available adhesive include IMB-003 manufactured by Teikoku Ink.
  • the method for producing a decorative molded body is a step of placing a decorative molded film formed into a quadrilateral of a certain dimension in a mold for injection molding and closing the mold, and then putting the molten resin in the mold. And a step of taking out when the injected resin is solidified.
  • a mold for injection molding (that is, a molding die) used for manufacturing a decorative molded body includes a mold having a convex shape (that is, a male mold) and a mold having a concave shape corresponding to the convex shape (that is, a mold). After the decorative molding film is disposed on the molding surface that is the inner peripheral surface of the female mold, the mold is closed.
  • the decorative molding film is molded (preformed) using a molding die to form a decorative molding film. It is also possible to provide a three-dimensional shape in advance and supply it to a molding die. In addition, when the decorative film is placed in the molding die, it is necessary to position the decorative molding film and the molding die while the decorative molding film is inserted into the molding die.
  • a method for aligning the decorative molding film and the molding die is to insert the fixing pin of the male die into the alignment hole of the female die. There is a way to hold.
  • the positioning hole is formed in the female mold in advance at the end of the decorative molded film (the position where the three-dimensional shape is not given after molding).
  • the fixing pin is formed in advance at a position where the fixing pin fits with the positioning hole in the male mold.
  • the following method is also used as a method of performing positioning between the decorative molding film and the molding die in a state where the decorative molding film is inserted into the molding die.
  • the following method is also used as a method of performing positioning between the decorative molding film and the molding die in a state where the decorative molding film is inserted into the molding die.
  • a method can be used.
  • the alignment mark is recognized at two or more diagonal points when viewed from the product part of the injection molded product (decorative molded product).
  • the temperature of the molten resin injected into the molding die is set according to the physical properties of the resin used.
  • the resin to be used is an acrylic resin
  • the temperature of the molten resin is preferably in the range from 240 ° C. to 260 ° C.
  • the position of the injection port (injection port) of the male mold is set to prevent the decorative molded film from being abnormally deformed by heat or gas generated when the molten resin is injected into the molding die. It may be set according to the shape of the molding die or the type of the molten resin. After the molten resin injected into the molding die into which the decorative molding film is inserted is solidified, the molding die is opened, and the decorative molding film is transferred from the molding die to the molding base, which is the solidified molten resin. Take out the fixed intermediate decorative molded body.
  • the intermediate decorative molded body a burr and a dummy portion of the decorative molded body are integrated around a decorative portion that finally becomes a product (decorative molded body).
  • the dummy portion has an insertion hole formed by inserting the fixing pin in the above-described alignment. For this reason, the decorative molded body can be obtained by performing the finishing process of removing the burrs and the dummy portions from the decorative portion of the intermediate decorative molded body before the finishing processing.
  • the decorative molded article obtained as described above may be exposed to increase the degree of curing of the colored layer in the decorative film. By performing this exposure, the adhesion between the colored layer and the transparent film and between the colored layer and the decorative molded body is further increased, and the durability against heat and the like is further improved.
  • the decorative film and the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure also preferably include three-dimensional molding.
  • the three-dimensional molding heat molding, vacuum molding, air pressure molding, vacuum pressure molding, and the like are preferably exemplified.
  • the method of vacuum molding is not particularly limited, but a method of performing three-dimensional molding in a heated state under vacuum is preferable.
  • the vacuum means a state in which the interior of the room is evacuated to a degree of vacuum of 100 Pa or less.
  • the temperature during the three-dimensional molding may be appropriately set according to the molding substrate to be used, but is preferably a temperature range of 60 ° C. or higher, more preferably a temperature range of 80 ° C. or higher, and further preferably a temperature range of 100 ° C. or higher. .
  • the upper limit of the temperature during three-dimensional molding is preferably 200 ° C.
  • the temperature at the time of performing three-dimensional molding refers to the temperature of the molding substrate used for three-dimensional molding, and is measured by attaching a thermocouple to the surface of the molding substrate.
  • the above-mentioned vacuum molding can be performed using a vacuum molding technique widely known in the molding field.
  • vacuum molding may be performed using Formech 508FS manufactured by Nippon Zokeki Kogyo Co., Ltd.
  • the application of the decorative molded body obtained as described above is not particularly limited and can be used for various articles, but the interior and exterior of automobiles, the interior and exterior of electric products, packaging containers and the like are particularly preferable. No.
  • Binder resin 40 mass% 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate solution of benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid (molar ratio 70/30) copolymer (weight average molecular weight Mw: 29,000)
  • Polymerizable compound Sartomer Japan Co., Ltd., urethane acrylate oligomer, CN-996NS (solid content: 100% by mass)
  • Polymerization initiator OXE-02 (1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazol-3-yl] ethanone-1- (O-acetyloxime) manufactured by BASF)
  • Surfactant Megafac (registered trademark) F-551, manufactured by DIC Corporation, a solution of a phosphate-type amine-neutralized product containing a perfluoroalkyl group in methyl isobutyl ketone (solid content: 30% by mass)
  • Organic solvent methyl
  • Carbon black, a dispersant, a polymer, and a solvent were mixed so as to have the following composition of a black pigment dispersion, and a black pigment dispersion was obtained using a three-roll mill and a bead mill.
  • the average particle size (median size) measured using Microtrack FRA (Honeywell) was 163 nm.
  • ⁇ Preparation of decorative film> (Preparation of temporary support) As a temporary support, a PET film with a release layer (Unipeel TR-6, thickness 75 ⁇ m, manufactured by Unitika Ltd.) was prepared.
  • the composition 1 for forming a colored layer is applied on the surface of the temporary support on which the release layer is to be applied so that the thickness after drying is 8 ⁇ m. This was dried at 110 ° C. for 2 minutes to form a colored layer. Thereafter, a polyethylene film (35 ⁇ m thick, GF-8 manufactured by Tamapoly Corporation) was adhered as a cover film. Thereafter, the entire surface was exposed at an exposure amount of 500 mJ / cm 2 (i-line) from both sides of the laminated body of the formed colored layer and the temporary support.
  • a color change layer B having a refractive index and a thickness shown in Table 1 was formed on the color change layer A.
  • a coating solution which is a composition for forming a color-changing layer B, is applied on the color-changing layer A in an amount of the thickness (thickness after drying) shown in Table 1. This was dried at 80 ° C. for 2 minutes to form a color change layer B. Thereafter, the entire surface was exposed from the formed color changing layer B side at an exposure amount of 300 mJ / cm 2 (i-line). However, Example 3 was not exposed.
  • SZR-M Zirconium oxide dispersion, Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., SZR-M, 30% by mass methanol solution, median diameter: 3 nm SZR-CW: zirconium oxide dispersion, SZR-CW manufactured by Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., 30% by mass aqueous solution, median diameter: 6 nm HTD-780T: titanium oxide particles, HTD-780T manufactured by Teica Corporation
  • Irgacure 2959 polymerization initiator, 1- [4- (2-hydroxyethoxy) phenyl] -2-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-1-one, manufactured by BASF, 1% by mass methanol dilution
  • Epocros WS-700 manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.
  • Epocross WS-700, an oxazoline group-containing polymer Pluscoat Z687 polyester resin Hydran HW-350: manufactured by Ryogo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • M-1200 bifunctional urethane acrylate
  • M -270 M-270, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., bifunctional urethane acrylate
  • sluria 4110 hollow silica particles
  • sluria 4110 manufactured by Nikki Shokubai Kasei Co., Ltd., average particle diameter 60 nm
  • MEK methyl ethyl ketone (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • Example 1 [Composition of composition for forming color change layer A] Ethoxylated O-phenylphenol acrylate: 3.65 parts by mass SZR-M: 18.41 parts by mass Irgacure 2959 (1% methanol dilution): 3.65 parts by mass F-444 (1% methanol dilution): 2 0.72 parts by mass. Methanol: 71.56 parts by mass.
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B ⁇ Polyfunctional acrylic monomer PET-30: 67.28 parts by mass ⁇ MEK: 29.92 parts by mass ⁇ F-444 (1% methanol dilution): 2.80 parts by mass
  • Example 2 The same composition as in Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer A.
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B -Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 6.26 parts by mass-Hollow silica particles (Thrulia 4110): 93.06 parts by mass-Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.66 parts by mass-F-444 (stock solution): 0.02 parts by mass
  • Example 3 As the composition for forming the color-change layer A, the same composition as the composition for forming the color-change layer B of Example 1 was used.
  • composition for forming color-change layer B Composition of emulsion particle dispersion 1- Hexadecane (n-hexadecane, manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.): 2.77 partsCa-1 (hexadecylpyridinium chloride 10% diluted in distilled water, cationic surfactant, Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) Preparation: 4.42 parts / Distilled water: 42.81 parts
  • the emulsion particle dispersion 1 was prepared in detail by the following procedure.
  • Hexadecane, Ca-1, and ion-exchanged water are mixed, and cooled with ice water using an ultrasonic homogenizer Sonifier 450 manufactured by Nippon Emerson Co., Ltd., and treated with stirring for 30 minutes, whereby an emulsion of hexadecane is present in water. A dispersion was obtained.
  • MS-51 is a compound in which R 1 , R 2 and R 3 in the above formula 1 are methyl groups, m is 2, and n is 5 on average.
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B- ⁇ Core-shell particle dispersion 1 15.04 parts ⁇ Ion-exchanged water: 79.46 parts ⁇ F-444 (diluted with 1% distilled water): 5.50 parts
  • ion-exchanged water and F-444 were added to the core-shell particle dispersion 1, and the mixture was stirred at 25 ° C. for 2 days to obtain a composition for forming a color-change layer B of Example 3.
  • Example 4 As the composition for forming the color-change layer A, the same composition as the composition for forming the color-change layer B of Example 1 was used.
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B -Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 0.60 parts by mass-Hollow silica particles (Thrulia 4110): 8.95 parts by mass-Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.06 parts by mass-F-444 (1% methanol) (Dilution): 4.87 parts by mass. Methanol: 85.51 parts by mass.
  • Example 5 As the composition for forming the color-change layer A, the same composition as the composition for forming the color-change layer B of Example 1 was used. The same composition as that of Example 4 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer B.
  • Example 8 The same composition as in Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer A.
  • Example 2 The same composition as that used in Example 2 was used as the composition for forming the color change layer B.
  • Example 11 [Composition of composition for forming color change layer A] Ethoxylated O-phenylphenol acrylate: 5.90 parts by mass Zirconium oxide dispersion (SZR-M): 10.83 parts by mass Irgacure 2959 (1% methanol dilution): 5.90 parts by mass F-444 (1 % Methanol dilution): 4.54 parts by mass. Methanol: 72.83 parts by mass.
  • Example 2 The same composition as in Example 2 was used as the composition for forming the color change layer B.
  • Example 12 [Composition of composition for forming color change layer A] Ethoxylated O-phenylphenol acrylate: 7.74 parts by mass Zirconium oxide dispersion (SZR-M): 4.64 parts by mass Irgacure 2959 (diluted with 1% methanol): 7.74 parts by mass F-444 (1 % Methanol dilution): 4.54 parts by mass. Methanol: 75.34 parts by mass.
  • SZR-M Zirconium oxide dispersion
  • Irgacure 2959 diluted with 1% methanol
  • F-444 (1 % Methanol dilution
  • Example 2 The same composition as in Example 2 was used as the composition for forming the color change layer B.
  • Example 13 The same composition as that of Example 12 was used as the composition for forming the color change layer A.
  • the same composition as in Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer B.
  • Example 14 [Composition of composition for forming color change layer A] Ethoxy O-phenylphenol acrylate: 8.20 parts by mass Titanium oxide particles (HTD-780T): 3.09 parts by mass Irgacure 2959 (1% methanol dilution): 8.20 parts by mass F-444 (1% (Methanol dilution): 4.54 parts by mass. Methanol: 75.97 parts by mass.
  • Example 4 The same composition as that of Example 4 was used for the composition for forming the color change layer B.
  • Example 15 The same composition as in Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer A.
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B ⁇ Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 10.37 parts by mass ⁇ Hollow silica particles (Thrulia 4110): 70.28 parts by mass ⁇ Irgacure 2959 (powder): 1.09 parts by mass ⁇ F-444 (stock solution): 0.04 parts by mass / methanol: 18.22 parts by mass
  • Example 16 The same composition as in Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer A.
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B ⁇ Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 14.63 parts by mass ⁇ Hollow silica particles (Suria 4110): 46.74 parts by mass ⁇ Irgacure 2959 (powder): 1.54 parts by mass ⁇ F-444 (stock solution): 0.04 parts by mass / methanol: 37.05 parts by mass
  • Example 17 The same composition as in Example 3 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer A.
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B -Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 2.79 parts by mass-Hollow silica particles (Suria 4110): 8.91 parts by mass-Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.29 parts by mass-F-444 (stock solution): 0.05 parts by mass / methanol: 87.96 parts by mass
  • Example 18 [Composition of composition for forming color change layer A] -Urethane acrylate monomer (M-1200): 67.14 parts by mass-MEK: 29.86 parts by mass-Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.20 parts by mass-F-444 (1% methanol dilution): 2.78 parts by mass Department
  • Example 4 The same composition as that of Example 4 was used for the composition for forming the color change layer B.
  • Example 19 In Example 1, after the protective film of the remaining pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was peeled off, an acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer (ABS) film (also referred to as ABS backer) was laminated (250 ⁇ m thick, manufactured by Okamoto Corporation). Temperature: 30 ° C., linear pressure: 100 N / cm, conveyance speed: 0.1 m / min) to give the decorative molded film of Example 19 in which the ABS, the adhesive layer, the colored layer, the transparent film, and the resin layer were arranged in this order. Produced.
  • ABS acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer
  • SZR-CW massZirconium oxide dispersion
  • 2-sulfonite oxysuccinate manufactured by FUJIFILM Fine Chemicals Co., Ltd., diluted with 1% water
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B Acrylate monomer (M-270): 555.12 parts by mass MEK: 444.10 parts by mass Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.56 parts by mass F-444 (1% methanol dilution): 0.22 parts by mass
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B The same composition as in Example 20 was used as the composition for forming a color-change layer B.
  • Example 22 [Composition of composition for forming color change layer A]
  • Acrylic resin (Epocross WS-700): 109.76 parts by mass Zirconium oxide dispersion (SZR-CW): 215.58 parts by mass
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B The same composition as in Example 20 was used as the composition for forming a color-change layer B.
  • composition for forming the color-change layer A As the composition for forming the color-change layer A, the same composition as the composition for forming the color-change layer B of Example 1 was used.
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B ⁇ Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 3.46 parts by mass ⁇ Hollow silica particles (Thrulia 4110): 5.46 parts by mass ⁇ Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.36 parts by mass ⁇ F-444 (1% methanol) (Dilution): 4.75 parts by mass. Methanol: 85.97 parts by mass.
  • composition for forming the color-change layer A As the composition for forming the color-change layer A, the same composition as the composition for forming the color-change layer B of Example 1 was used. Further, the color change layer B was not formed.
  • composition of composition for forming color change layer B ⁇ Polyfunctional acrylic monomer (PET-30): 4.91 parts by mass ⁇ MEK: 90.34 parts by mass ⁇ F-444 (1% methanol dilution): 4.75 parts by mass
  • Comparative Example 4 The same composition as that of Comparative Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color change layer B. Further, the color change layer A was not formed.
  • Example 19 Assuming an automobile emblem, three-dimensional moldability of a cylindrical stainless steel member having a diameter of 10 cm and a height of 3 mm was evaluated for occurrence of cracks or the like during stretching.
  • Example 19 in which ABS was laminated before the test, the obtained film was used as it was, and in the other Examples and Comparative Examples, after the protective sheet of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was peeled off, the ABS film was laminated (thickness 250 ⁇ m, The test was carried out after laminating Okamoto Co., Ltd. at a laminating temperature of 30 ° C., a linear pressure of 100 N / cm, and a conveying speed of 0.1 m / min. Using a columnar member, the obtained decorative film was vacuum molded at a heating temperature of 120 ° C., and whether or not cracks occurred on the surface was visually evaluated.
  • B Crack occurred on the surface
  • the decorative film obtained was measured for specular reflectance using an ultraviolet-visible infrared spectrophotometer V-560 (manufactured by JASCO Corporation) and an absolute reflectance measuring device ARV-474 to improve the design. evaluated.
  • a value R des obtained by dividing the maximum value R max of the reflectance of the obtained decorative film in visible light (wavelength 380 nm to 780 nm) by the reflectance R 700 nm in the wavelength of 700 nm was used. The larger the R des, the better the color change.
  • the evaluation criteria are as follows according to the value of R des .
  • a to C are preferred. A: 2% or more B: 1.5% or more and less than 2% C: 1% or more and less than 1.5% D: 0.5% or more and less than 1% E: less than 0.5%
  • the evaluation of the scratch resistance of the obtained decorative film was performed by a steel wool rubbing test using a surface property measuring device Heidon Type 18S manufactured by Shinto Kagaku Co., Ltd. In the steel wool rub test, a 30 mm ⁇ Nippon Steel Wool Co., Ltd. Bonster commercial grade # 0000 was pressed against the surface of the decorative film (load 50 g), swing stroke 50 mm, swing speed 1000 mm / min, 10 reciprocating conditions. And then visually evaluated the appearance. The evaluation criteria are shown below. As the evaluation result, A is preferable. A: The number of scratches is 20 or less B: The number of scratches is more than 20
  • Acrylic 1 Ethoxylated O-phenylphenol acrylate or a polymer thereof
  • Acrylic 2 PET-30 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. or a polymer thereof
  • Siloxane 1 MS-51 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation)
  • Hydrolysis condensate Acrylic 4: M-510 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. or polymer thereof
  • Acrylic 5 M-510 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. or polymer thereof
  • Acrylic 6 M manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. -510 or its polymer
  • Acrylic 7 M-270 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • Acrylic 8 Epocross WS-700 manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd. Urethane: M-1200 or a polymer thereof Polyester: Pluscoat Z687 manufactured by Ryogo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Polyurethane: Hydran HW-350 manufactured by DIC Corporation ZrO 2 -A: SZR-M ZrO 2 -B: SZR-CW TiO 2 : HTD-780T Hollow silica: Sluria 4110 manufactured by JGC Catalysts & Chemicals, Inc.
  • the decorative films of Examples 1 to 18 and 20 to 22 and the decorative molded film of Example 19 had a color change property (comparable to the decorative films of Comparative Examples 1 to 4). Excellent design).
  • the decorative films of Examples 1 to 18 and 20 to 22 and the decorative molded film of Example 19 also have three-dimensional moldability, black tightness, and scratch resistance. Excellent.

Landscapes

  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention addresses the problem of providing a decorative film having exceptional color change properties, a decoration method and a method for producing a decorative molded body in which the decorative film is used, and a decorative molded film having exceptional color change properties. This decorative film (10) has, in the stated order, a temporary support body (22), a coloration layer (24), a color change layer A (28) that includes at least one compound selected from the group consisting of resins and polymeric compounds, and a color change layer B (30). The color change layer B (30) is such that the refractive index thereof is at least 0.1 less than that of the color change layer A (28). This decorative molded film (40) has, in the stated order, a substrate (16), a coloration layer (24), a color change layer A (28) that includes at least one compound selected from the group consisting of resins and polymeric compounds, and a color change layer B (30). The color change layer B (30) is such that the refractive index thereof is at least 0.1 less than that of the color change layer A (28).

Description

加飾フィルム、加飾方法、加飾成型体の製造方法、及び、加飾成型フィルムDecorative film, decoration method, method for manufacturing decorative molded body, and decorative molded film
 本開示は、加飾フィルム、加飾方法、加飾成型体の製造方法、及び、加飾成型フィルムに関する。 The present disclosure relates to a decorative film, a decorative method, a method for manufacturing a decorative molded body, and a decorative molded film.
 樹脂成型体の表面に加飾フィルムを配置して、表面を所望の色相に着色したり、表面に所望の模様を設けたりした加飾成型体が知られている。
 加飾成型体は、例えば、金型内に加飾成型フィルムを予め配置して、その金型内に基材樹脂を射出成型することにより得られ、樹脂成型体の表面に加飾フィルムが一体化された構造を有する。
 本開示において、加飾成型フィルムとは、成型用基材に加飾フィルムが貼り付けられたものをいう。
 ここで、金型内に加飾成型フィルムを予め配置した後、基材樹脂の射出成型を行うことを、一般に、フィルムインサート成型、或いは、単にインサート成型と称することがある。
 また、加飾成型体は、成型後の成型体に加飾フィルムを貼り付けることにより製造してもよい。
2. Description of the Related Art A decorative molded body in which a decorative film is arranged on the surface of a resin molded body to color the surface into a desired hue or a desired pattern is provided on the surface is known.
The decorative molded body is obtained, for example, by placing a decorative molded film in a mold in advance and injecting a base resin into the mold, and the decorative film is integrally formed on the surface of the resin molded body. It has a generalized structure.
In the present disclosure, the decorative molded film refers to a film obtained by attaching a decorative film to a molding substrate.
Here, performing the injection molding of the base resin after disposing the decorative molding film in the mold in advance may be generally referred to as film insert molding or simply insert molding.
Moreover, you may manufacture a decorative molded object by sticking a decorative film to the molded object after shaping | molding.
 また、従来のインモールド用ハードコート転写箔としては、特許文献1に、離型性基材シートの離型面上に、転写層を有するインモールド用転写箔において、上記転写層が、少なくとも、第1の透明架橋硬化樹脂層、印刷絵柄層、第2の透明架橋硬化樹脂層、金属光沢層又は金属調印刷層、及び、接着剤層を順次積層してなり、上記第2の透明架橋型硬化樹脂層が、厚さ20μm~100μmであることを特徴とするインモールド用ハードコート転写箔が記載されている。
 更に、従来の加飾積層体としては、特許文献2に、少なくとも、第1の基材層、離型層、色変化層B、および第2の基材層が順に積層された加飾シートであって、JIS B0601:2001に基づいて、カットオフ値を0.8mmとして、上記加飾シートが被転写体へ転写された場合の転写層の表面を測定したときの凹凸の平均間隔Smが、上記転写層の表面の少なくとも一部の領域において、0.05mm以上0.20mm以下である、加飾シートが記載されている。
Further, as a conventional in-mold hard coat transfer foil, Patent Document 1, in the in-mold transfer foil having a transfer layer on the release surface of the release substrate sheet, at least the transfer layer, A first transparent cross-linked cured resin layer, a printed picture layer, a second transparent cross-linked cured resin layer, a metallic gloss layer or a metallic print layer, and an adhesive layer, which are sequentially laminated, and the second transparent cross-linked type There is described an in-mold hard coat transfer foil, wherein the cured resin layer has a thickness of 20 μm to 100 μm.
Further, as a conventional decorative laminate, Patent Document 2 discloses a decorative sheet in which at least a first base material layer, a release layer, a color changing layer B, and a second base material layer are sequentially stacked. Then, based on JIS B0601: 2001, the cut-off value is set to 0.8 mm, and the average interval Sm of irregularities when measuring the surface of the transfer layer when the decorative sheet is transferred to the transfer target is A decorative sheet having a thickness of 0.05 mm or more and 0.20 mm or less in at least a part of the surface of the transfer layer is described.
  特許文献1:特開2011-11376号公報
  特許文献2:特開2017-47597号公報
Patent Document 1: JP-A-2011-11376 Patent Document 2: JP-A-2017-47597
 本発明の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、色変化性に優れる加飾フィルムを提供することである。
 また、本発明の他の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、上記加飾フィルムを用いた加飾方法、及び、加飾成型体の製造方法を提供することである。
 また、本発明の更に他の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、色変化性に優れる加飾成型フィルムを提供することである。
The problem to be solved by one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a decorative film having excellent color change.
A problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a decorating method using the decorating film and a method for manufacturing a decorating molded article.
A problem to be solved by yet another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a decorative molded film having excellent color change.
 上記課題を解決するための手段には、以下の態様が含まれる。
<1> 仮支持体、着色層、樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含む色変化層A、並びに、色変化層Bをこの順に有し、上記色変化層Bが、上記色変化層Aよりも屈折率が0.1以上低い層である加飾フィルム。
<2> 上記着色層が、樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含む<1>に記載の加飾フィルム。
<3> 上記着色層の厚みが、3μm以上である<1>又は<2>に記載の加飾フィルム。
<4> 上記着色層が、着色剤として、顔料を含む<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルム。
<5> 上記着色層が、ウレタン結合、及び、炭素数2又は3のアルキレンオキシ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の部分構造を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物を少なくとも硬化してなる層である<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルム。
<6> 上記色変化層Bが、上記色変化層Aよりも屈折率が0.25以上低い層である<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルム。
<7> 上記色変化層Aの屈折率が、1.6以上である<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルム。
<8> 上記色変化層Aが、酸化ジルコニウム又は酸化チタンを更に含む<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルム。
<9> 上記色変化層Bの屈折率が、1.4以下である<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルム。
<10> 上記色変化層Bが、空隙を有するシロキサン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、及び、中空シリカ粒子よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1つを含む<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルム。
<11> 上記色変化層Aの厚みが5μm以上であるか、又は、上記色変化層Bの厚みが5μm以上である<1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルム。
<12> 上記色変化層Aの厚みが5μm以上であり、かつ上記色変化層Bの厚みが1μm以下である<1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルム。
<13> 上記色変化層Aの厚みが1μm以下であり、かつ上記色変化層Bの厚みが5μm以上である<1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルム。
<14> 成型用加飾フィルムである<1>~<13>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルム。
<15> <1>~<14>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルムから上記仮支持体を剥離する工程と、上記仮支持体を剥離した上記加飾フィルムを上記着色層側から基材に貼り付ける工程とを含む加飾方法。
<16> 上記仮支持体を剥離した上記加飾フィルムにおける上記仮支持体を剥離した面に粘着層を形成する工程を更に含む<15>に記載の加飾方法。
<17> 上記基材が、成型用基材である、<15>又は<16>に記載の加飾方法。
<18> <1>~<14>のいずれか1つに記載の加飾フィルムから上記仮支持体を剥離する工程と、上記仮支持体を剥離した上記加飾フィルムを上記着色層側から成型用基材に貼り付ける工程と、上記加飾フィルムが貼り付いた上記成型用基材を成型する工程とを含む加飾成型体の製造方法。
<19> 基材、着色層、樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含む色変化層A、並びに、色変化層Bをこの順に有し、上記色変化層Bが、上記色変化層Aよりも屈折率が0.1以上低い層である加飾成型フィルム。
Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
<1> The color change layer having a temporary support, a color layer, a color change layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, and a color change layer B in this order. A decorative film in which B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.1 or more.
<2> The decorative film according to <1>, wherein the colored layer contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound.
<3> The decorative film according to <1> or <2>, wherein the thickness of the coloring layer is 3 μm or more.
<4> The decorative film according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the coloring layer contains a pigment as a coloring agent.
<5> The colored layer is obtained by curing at least a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a urethane bond and at least one partial structure selected from the group consisting of alkyleneoxy groups having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. The decorative film according to any one of <1> to <4>, which is a layer.
<6> The decorative film according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the color change layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.25 or more.
<7> The decorative film according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein the refractive index of the color change layer A is 1.6 or more.
<8> The decorative film according to any one of <1> to <7>, wherein the color changing layer A further contains zirconium oxide or titanium oxide.
<9> The decorative film according to any one of <1> to <8>, wherein the refractive index of the color change layer B is 1.4 or less.
<10> The color changing layer B according to any one of <1> to <9>, wherein the color change layer B includes at least one selected from the group consisting of a siloxane resin having a void, a fluororesin, and hollow silica particles. Decorative film.
<11> The decorative film according to any one of <1> to <10>, wherein the color change layer A has a thickness of 5 μm or more, or the color change layer B has a thickness of 5 μm or more.
<12> The decorative film according to any one of <1> to <11>, wherein the thickness of the color change layer A is 5 μm or more, and the thickness of the color change layer B is 1 μm or less.
<13> The decorative film according to any one of <1> to <11>, wherein the thickness of the color changing layer A is 1 μm or less, and the thickness of the color changing layer B is 5 μm or more.
<14> The decorative film according to any one of <1> to <13>, which is a decorative film for molding.
<15> The step of peeling the temporary support from the decorative film according to any one of <1> to <14>, and the step of peeling off the decorative film from which the temporary support is peeled from the colored layer side. A decorating method including a step of attaching to a material.
<16> The decorating method according to <15>, further comprising a step of forming an adhesive layer on a surface of the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off, from which the temporary support has been peeled off.
<17> The decorating method according to <15> or <16>, wherein the substrate is a molding substrate.
<18> a step of peeling the temporary support from the decorative film according to any one of <1> to <14>, and molding the decorative film from which the temporary support is peeled from the colored layer side A method for producing a decorative molded body, comprising: a step of attaching to a substrate for molding; and a step of molding the substrate for molding to which the decorative film is attached.
<19> The color change layer B having a color change layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a substrate, a color layer, a resin and a polymerizable compound, and a color change layer B in this order. Is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.1 or more.
 本発明の一実施形態によれば、色変化性に優れる加飾フィルムを提供することができる。
 また、本発明の他の一実施形態によれば、上記加飾フィルムを用いた加飾方法、及び、加飾成型体の製造方法を提供することができる。
 また、本発明の更に他の一実施形態によれば、色変化性に優れる加飾成型フィルムを提供することができる。
According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a decorative film having excellent color changeability.
Further, according to another embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a decorating method using the decorating film and a method of manufacturing a decorative molded body.
According to still another embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a decorative molded film having excellent color changeability.
本開示に係る加飾フィルムの一例を示す概略断面図である。1 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating an example of a decorative film according to the present disclosure. 本開示に係る加飾フィルムの他の一例を示す概略断面図である。It is an outline sectional view showing other examples of the decoration film concerning this indication. 本開示に係る加飾成型フィルムの一例を示す概略断面図である。1 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating an example of a decorative molded film according to the present disclosure.
 以下、本開示に係る加飾フィルムの製造方法の一実施形態について説明する。但し、本発明は、以下の実施形態に何ら限定されるものではなく、本開示の目的の範囲内において、適宜変更を加えて実施することができる。 Hereinafter, one embodiment of a method for manufacturing a decorative film according to the present disclosure will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to the following embodiments at all, and can be implemented with appropriate changes within the scope of the present disclosure.
 本開示における基(原子団)の表記について、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。また、本明細書中における「有機基」とは、少なくとも1個の炭素原子を含む基をいう。
 本開示における「活性光線」又は「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光: Extreme Ultraviolet)、X線、及び電子線(EB:Electron Beam)等を意味する。本明細書中における「光」とは、活性光線又は放射線を意味する。
 本開示における「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線、X線、及びEUV光等による露光のみならず、電子線、及びイオンビーム等の粒子線による露光も含む。
 本開示において、「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用される。
Regarding the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present disclosure, the notation that does not indicate substituted or unsubstituted includes those having a substituent as well as those having no substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group). Further, the “organic group” in the present specification refers to a group containing at least one carbon atom.
The term “actinic ray” or “radiation” in the present disclosure refers to, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet (EUV light: Extreme Ultraviolet), X-ray, and electron beam (EB: Electron). Beam) or the like. As used herein, “light” means actinic rays or radiation.
The term “exposure” in the present disclosure means, unless otherwise specified, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far-ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and EUV light, as well as electron beams and ion beams. Exposure with particle beams such as
In the present disclosure, “to” is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as the lower limit and the upper limit.
 本開示において、(メタ)アクリレートはアクリレート及びメタクリレートを表し、(メタ)アクリルはアクリル及びメタクリルを表す。
 本開示において、樹脂成分の重量平均分子量(Mw)、数平均分子量(Mn)、及び分散度(分子量分布ともいう)(Mw/Mn)は、GPC(Gel Permeation Chromatography)装置(東ソー(株)製HLC-8120GPC)によるGPC測定(溶媒:テトラヒドロフラン、流量(サンプル注入量):10μL、カラム:東ソー(株)製TSK gel Multipore HXL-M、カラム温度:40℃、流速:1.0mL/分、検出器:示差屈折率検出器(Refractive Index Detector))によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。
In the present disclosure, (meth) acrylate represents acrylate and methacrylate, and (meth) acryl represents acryl and methacryl.
In the present disclosure, the weight average molecular weight (Mw), the number average molecular weight (Mn), and the degree of dispersion (also referred to as molecular weight distribution) (Mw / Mn) of the resin component are determined by a GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) apparatus (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation). GPC measurement by HLC-8120GPC (solvent: tetrahydrofuran, flow rate (sample injection amount): 10 μL, column: TSK gel Multipore HXL-M manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, column temperature: 40 ° C., flow rate: 1.0 mL / min, detection) Detector: Defined as a polystyrene-equivalent value obtained by a differential refractive index detector (Refractive Index Detector).
 本明細書において組成物中の各成分の量は、組成物中に各成分に該当する物質が複数存在する場合、特に断らない限り、組成物中に存在する該当する複数の物質の合計量を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけでなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても工程の所期の目的が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本明細書において「全固形分」とは、組成物の全組成から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。また、「固形分」とは、上述のように、溶剤を除いた成分であり、例えば、25℃において固体であっても、液体であってもよい。
 本明細書において、「質量%」と「重量%」とは同義であり、「質量部」と「重量部」とは同義である。
 また、本明細書において、2以上の好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
In the present specification, the amount of each component in the composition, when there are a plurality of substances corresponding to each component in the composition, unless otherwise specified, the total amount of the plurality of corresponding substances present in the composition. means.
In the present specification, the term “step” is included in the term as well as an independent step as long as the intended purpose of the step is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other steps.
As used herein, “total solids” refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the composition. As described above, the “solid content” is a component excluding the solvent, and may be a solid or a liquid at 25 ° C., for example.
In the present specification, “% by mass” and “% by weight” have the same meaning, and “parts by mass” and “parts by weight” have the same meaning.
In this specification, a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
(加飾フィルム)
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、仮支持体、着色層、樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含む色変化層A、並びに、色変化層Bをこの順に有し、上記色変化層Bが、上記色変化層Aよりも屈折率が0.1以上低い層である。
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムの用途としては、特に制限はなく、具体的には、例えば、自動車、家電製品、オーディオ製品、コンピュータ、ディスプレイ、車載製品、時計、アクセサリー、光学部品、扉、窓ガラス、建材等の加飾に用いることができる。
 中でも、本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、自動車外装の加飾に使用する加飾フィルムとして好適に用いることができる。
 また、本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、立体成型性にも優れることから、立体成型、インサート成型等の成型に用いられる、成型用加飾フィルムとして好適であり、立体成型用加飾フィルムとしてより好適である。
 例えば、本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、仮支持体を剥離し、後述する粘着層を設け、後述する成型用基材に貼り付けて加飾成型フィルムとする用途、又は、粘着層を成型体に貼り付けて加飾成型体とする用途に好適に用いられる。
(Decorative film)
The decorative film according to the present disclosure includes a temporary support, a colored layer, a color change layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, and a color change layer B in this order. The color change layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.1 or more.
The application of the decorative film according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited, and specifically includes, for example, automobiles, home appliances, audio products, computers, displays, in-vehicle products, watches, accessories, optical components, doors, and window glasses. It can be used for decoration of building materials.
Above all, the decorative film according to the present disclosure can be suitably used as a decorative film used for decoration of an automobile exterior.
Further, the decorative film according to the present disclosure is excellent in three-dimensional moldability, so that it is suitable as a decorative film for molding, which is used for molding such as three-dimensional molding and insert molding. It is suitable.
For example, the decorative film according to the present disclosure may be used as a decorative molded film by peeling off the temporary support, providing an adhesive layer described below, and attaching to a molding substrate described later, or forming the adhesive layer into a molded body. It is suitably used for applications in which a decorative molded article is formed by sticking to a molded article.
 従来、家電、電子機器、携帯電話などに使用されている表面加飾には、印刷、塗装、蒸着、めっき等が用いられてきた。
 しかしながら、機能性付与、環境負荷の問題や、貼り替え可能などの側面から、加飾フィルムを使用することによる加飾技術が多く用いられるようになってきた。
 一方で、使用者の嗜好の広がりから、新規な意匠性が求められている。
 色(例えば、色味、微細な色合い)の変化(「色変化性」ともいう。)が生じる意匠を、今回、本発明者らは新規に見出し、加飾技術としての導入を検討した。
 また、本開示において、色変化性は、単純な色の変化だけでなく、視認方向に応じた色の変化であってもよく、上記色の変化の度合いが大きいほうが、上記色変化性に優れる。
Conventionally, printing, painting, vapor deposition, plating, and the like have been used for surface decoration used in home appliances, electronic devices, mobile phones, and the like.
However, a decoration technique using a decoration film has come to be used in many cases from the viewpoints of imparting functionality and environmental load, and from any removable side.
On the other hand, new design properties are required from the spread of user preferences.
The present inventors have newly found a design in which a change in color (for example, tint, fine hue) (also referred to as “color changeability”) has been made, and have studied the introduction thereof as a decoration technique.
Further, in the present disclosure, the color change may be not only a simple color change, but also a color change according to the viewing direction, and the larger the degree of the color change, the better the color change. .
 本発明者らは鋭意検討を重ねた結果、上記構成の加飾フィルムとすることにより、色変化性に優れることを見出した。
 詳細な上記効果の発現機構は不明であるが、以下のように推定している。仮支持体、着色層、樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含む色変化層A、並びに、色変化層Bをこの順に有し、上記色変化層Aと上記色変化層Bとの屈折率差が0.1以上であることにより、上記色変化層Aと上記色変化層Bとの界面における光の反射、上記色変化層Bの表面における光の反射、上記色変化層Aと上記着色層との界面における光の反射等により、光学干渉が生じることにより、上記着色層を上記色変化層A及び上記色変化層Bを介して視認すると上記色の変化が生じ、一例としては、構造色のような特殊な意匠性を示すと推定している。
As a result of intensive studies, the present inventors have found that the decorative film having the above-described structure has excellent color changeability.
Although the detailed mechanism of the manifestation of the above effects is unknown, it is estimated as follows. A temporary support, a colored layer, a color-changing layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, and a color-changing layer B in this order; When the refractive index difference between the color changing layer B and the color changing layer B is 0.1 or more, light reflection at the interface between the color changing layer A and the color changing layer B, light reflection at the surface of the color changing layer B, When the color layer is visually recognized through the color change layer A and the color change layer B due to optical interference due to reflection of light at the interface between the color change layer A and the color layer, the color change It is presumed that a special design such as a structural color is exhibited as an example.
 以下、本開示に係る加飾フィルムについて、詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the decorative film according to the present disclosure will be described in detail.
〔色変化層A及び色変化層Bの屈折率〕
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、上記色変化層Bが、上記色変化層Aよりも屈折率が0.1以上低い層である。
 本開示において、屈折率は、25℃における550nmの波長の光に対する屈折率である。
 また、本開示における各層の屈折率は、無アルカリガラスOA-10G(日本電気硝子(株)製)上に形成した色変化層A、色変化層Bの単独膜に対して分光光度計で透過スペクトルを測定し、前記測定で得られた透過率と、光干渉法により計算で算出した透過率と、を用い、フィッティング解析を行うことにより、各層の膜厚及び屈折率を求めるか、又は、カルニュー精密屈折計(KPR-3000、(株)島津製作所製)を用いて測定するものとする。
[Refractive index of color change layer A and color change layer B]
In the decorative film according to the present disclosure, the color change layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.1 or more.
In the present disclosure, the refractive index is a refractive index for light having a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
In addition, the refractive index of each layer in the present disclosure is determined by transmitting a single film of the color change layer A and the color change layer B formed on the alkali-free glass OA-10G (manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd.) with a spectrophotometer. Measure the spectrum, and the transmittance obtained by the measurement, and the transmittance calculated by the light interference method, using a fitting analysis, to determine the thickness and refractive index of each layer, or The measurement is performed using a Karnew precision refractometer (KPR-3000, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation).
 上記色変化層Aの屈折率は、色変化性、及び、黒しまり性(外部からの反射光による映り込み抑制性、例えば、蛍光灯の映り込みの抑制性)の観点から、1.5以上であることが好ましく、1.6以上であることがより好ましく、1.65以上であることが更に好ましく、1.70以上であることが特に好ましい。また、上限は、2.3以下であることが好ましく、1.9以下であることがより好ましい。
 上記色変化層Bの屈折率は、色変化性、及び、黒しまり性の観点から、1.5以下であることが好ましく、1.5未満であることがより好ましく、1.4以下であることが更に好ましく、1.35以下であることが特に好ましく、1.32以下であることが最も好ましい。また、下限は、1.1以上であることが好ましく、1.2以上であることがより好ましく、1.28以上であることが特に好ましい。
The refractive index of the color change layer A is 1.5 or more from the viewpoints of color change property and black tightness (reflection suppression effect by reflected light from the outside, for example, suppression of reflection of a fluorescent lamp). Is preferably 1.6 or more, more preferably 1.65 or more, and particularly preferably 1.70 or more. Further, the upper limit is preferably 2.3 or less, more preferably 1.9 or less.
The refractive index of the color change layer B is preferably 1.5 or less, more preferably less than 1.5, and more preferably 1.4 or less, from the viewpoints of color change and blackness. More preferably, it is particularly preferably 1.35 or less, most preferably 1.32 or less. Further, the lower limit is preferably 1.1 or more, more preferably 1.2 or more, and particularly preferably 1.28 or more.
 上記色変化層Bは、上記色変化層Aよりも、屈折率が0.1以上低い層であり、色変化性、及び、黒しまり性の観点から、屈折率が0.15以上低い層であることが好ましく、屈折率が0.2以上低い層であることがより好ましく、屈折率が0.25以上低い層であることが更に好ましく、屈折率が0.25以上0.60以下低い層であることが特に好ましい。
 また、色変化性、黒しまり性、及び、耐傷性の観点から、上記色変化層Aの屈折率が1.6以上であり、かつ上記色変化層Bの屈折率が1.5以下であることが好ましく、上記色変化層Aの屈折率が1.65以上であり、かつ上記色変化層Bの屈折率が1.4以下であることがより好ましい。
 更に、色変化性、及び、黒しまり性の観点からは、上記色変化層Aの屈折率が1.5以上であり、かつ上記色変化層Bの屈折率が1.4以下であることが好ましい。
The color changing layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color changing layer A by 0.1 or more, and is a layer having a refractive index lower by 0.15 or more from the viewpoint of color changeability and blackness. It is preferable that the layer has a refractive index of at least 0.2 or lower, more preferably a layer having a refractive index of at least 0.25 or lower, more preferably a layer having a refractive index of at least 0.25 or lower at 0.60 or lower. Is particularly preferred.
Further, from the viewpoints of color change property, black tightness, and scratch resistance, the refractive index of the color change layer A is 1.6 or more, and the refractive index of the color change layer B is 1.5 or less. More preferably, the refractive index of the color changing layer A is 1.65 or more, and the refractive index of the color changing layer B is more preferably 1.4 or less.
Further, from the viewpoint of color change property and blackness, the color change layer A has a refractive index of 1.5 or more, and the color change layer B has a refractive index of 1.4 or less. preferable.
〔各層の好ましい厚み〕
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、仮支持体、着色層、色変化層A、並びに、色変化層Bをこの順に有する。
 上記仮支持体の厚みは、特に制限はないが、剥離性の観点から、10μm~500μmが好ましく、20μm~300μmがより好ましく、50μm~150μmが特に好ましい。
 上記着色層の厚みは、特に制限はないが、色変化性及び立体成型性の観点から、0.5μm以上であることが好ましく、3μm以上であることがより好ましく、3μm~50μmであることが更に好ましく、3μm~20μmであることが特に好ましい。
 上記色変化層A及び上記色変化層Bの厚みはそれぞれ独立に、色変化性の観点から、50nm~50μmであることが好ましく、80nm~30μmであることがより好ましく、100nm~20μmであることが特に好ましい。
[Preferable thickness of each layer]
The decorative film according to the present disclosure is the decorative film according to the present disclosure having a temporary support, a coloring layer, a color changing layer A, and a color changing layer B in this order.
The thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 10 μm to 500 μm, more preferably from 20 μm to 300 μm, and particularly preferably from 50 μm to 150 μm, from the viewpoint of releasability.
The thickness of the colored layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.5 μm or more, more preferably 3 μm or more, and more preferably 3 μm to 50 μm from the viewpoint of color change and three-dimensional moldability. More preferably, it is particularly preferably 3 μm to 20 μm.
The thicknesses of the color change layer A and the color change layer B are each independently preferably from 50 nm to 50 μm, more preferably from 80 nm to 30 μm, and more preferably from 100 nm to 20 μm, from the viewpoint of color change. Is particularly preferred.
 色変化性の観点から、上記色変化層Aの厚さと上記色変化層Bの厚さとは異なることが好ましい。
 また、色変化性、及び、黒しまり性の観点から、上記色変化層Aの厚みが5μm以上であるか、又は、上記色変化層Bの厚みが5μm以上であることが好ましく、上記色変化層Aの厚みが5μm以上であり、かつ上記色変化層Bの厚みが1μm以下であるか、又は、上記色変化層Aの厚みが1μm以下であり、かつ上記色変化層Bの厚みが5μm以上であることがより好ましく、上記色変化層Aの厚みが7μm以上であり、かつ上記色変化層Bの厚みが0.8μm以下であるか、又は、上記色変化層Aの厚みが0.8μm以下であり、かつ上記色変化層Bの厚みが7μm以上であることが特に好ましい。上限は100μm以下であることが好ましい。
 色変化性の観点から、上記色変化層Aの厚さと屈折率、上記色変化層Bの厚さと屈折率、及び、着色層の膜厚の組合せは、以下の態様が好ましい。
From the viewpoint of color changeability, it is preferable that the thickness of the color change layer A and the thickness of the color change layer B are different.
In addition, from the viewpoint of color change property and black tightness, the thickness of the color change layer A is preferably 5 μm or more, or the thickness of the color change layer B is preferably 5 μm or more. The thickness of the layer A is 5 μm or more, and the thickness of the color change layer B is 1 μm or less, or the thickness of the color change layer A is 1 μm or less, and the thickness of the color change layer B is 5 μm. More preferably, the thickness of the color change layer A is 7 μm or more, and the thickness of the color change layer B is 0.8 μm or less, or the thickness of the color change layer A is 0.1 μm or less. It is particularly preferred that the thickness be 8 μm or less, and the thickness of the color change layer B be 7 μm or more. The upper limit is preferably 100 μm or less.
From the viewpoint of color changeability, the following combinations of the thickness and the refractive index of the color change layer A, the thickness and the refractive index of the color change layer B, and the thickness of the coloring layer are preferable.
 本開示に係る本開示に係る加飾フィルムにおける好ましい第1の態様としては、色変化層Bの屈折率が1.5以下(1.45以下がより好ましく、1.4以下が更に好ましく、1.35以下が特に好ましい。)であり、かつ色変化層Aの屈折率が1.6以上(1.65以上がより好ましく、1.7以上が更に好ましい。)である態様が好ましく挙げられる。
 また、第1の態様としては、色変化性の観点から、色変化層Bの膜厚が5μm以上(より好ましくは10μm以上)であり、色変化層Aの膜厚が1μm以下であり、かつ着色層が3μm以上であることが好ましい。
 第1の態様において、色変化層Aの膜厚は、青色の反射を強くするには、120nm~150nm、240nm~280nm、390nm~430nm、又は、530nm~560nmであることが好ましく、黄色の反射を強くするには、180nm~200nm、320nm~340nm、470nm~490nm、又は、600nm~620nmであることが好ましく、赤色の反射を強くするには、200nm~220nm、340nm~370nm、490nm~510nm、又は、620nm~640nmであることが好ましく、紫色の反射を強くするには、90nm~120nm、220nm~240nm、370nm~390nm、又は、510nm~530nmであることが好ましく、緑色の反射を強くするには、150nm~180nm、280nm~320nm、430nm~470nm、又は、560nm~600nmであることが好ましい。
As a first preferred embodiment of the decorative film according to the present disclosure according to the present disclosure, the refractive index of the color change layer B is 1.5 or less (more preferably 1.45 or less, still more preferably 1.4 or less). .35 or less, and the refractive index of the color-changing layer A is 1.6 or more (more preferably 1.65 or more, still more preferably 1.7 or more).
Further, as a first aspect, from the viewpoint of color changeability, the thickness of the color change layer B is 5 μm or more (more preferably, 10 μm or more), the thickness of the color change layer A is 1 μm or less, and It is preferable that the color layer has a thickness of 3 μm or more.
In the first embodiment, the thickness of the color change layer A is preferably 120 nm to 150 nm, 240 nm to 280 nm, 390 nm to 430 nm, or 530 nm to 560 nm in order to enhance blue reflection. Is preferably 180 nm to 200 nm, 320 nm to 340 nm, 470 nm to 490 nm, or 600 nm to 620 nm, and to enhance red reflection, 200 nm to 220 nm, 340 nm to 370 nm, 490 nm to 510 nm, Alternatively, it is preferably from 620 nm to 640 nm, and in order to enhance the reflection of purple, it is preferably from 90 nm to 120 nm, from 220 nm to 240 nm, from 370 nm to 390 nm, or from 510 nm to 530 nm. Is 150 nm 180nm, 280nm ~ 320nm, 430nm ~ 470nm, or preferably a 560 nm ~ 600 nm.
 本開示に係る本開示に係る加飾フィルムにおける好ましい第2の態様としては、色変化層Bの屈折率が1.4以下であり、かつ色変化層Aの屈折率が1.5以上である態様が好ましく挙げられる。
 また、第2の態様としては、色変化性の観点から、色変化層Bの膜厚が1μm以下であり、色変化層Aの膜厚が5μm以上であり、かつ着色層が3μm以上であることが好ましい。
 第2の態様において、色変化層Bの膜厚は、青色の反射を強くするには、120nm~160nm、又は、320nm~370nmであることが好ましく、黄色の反射を強くするには、210nm~260nm、又は、420~450nmであることが好ましく、赤色の反射を強くするには、260nm~290nmであることが好ましく、紫色の反射を強くするには、90nm~120nm、又は、290nm~320nmであることが好ましく、緑色の反射を強くするには、160nm~210nm、又は、370nm~420nmであることが好ましい。
As a preferable second aspect in the decorative film according to the present disclosure according to the present disclosure, the refractive index of the color changing layer B is 1.4 or less, and the refractive index of the color changing layer A is 1.5 or more. An embodiment is preferably mentioned.
Further, as a second aspect, from the viewpoint of color changeability, the thickness of the color change layer B is 1 μm or less, the thickness of the color change layer A is 5 μm or more, and the color layer is 3 μm or more. Is preferred.
In the second embodiment, the film thickness of the color change layer B is preferably from 120 nm to 160 nm or from 320 nm to 370 nm to enhance blue reflection, and from 210 nm to 370 nm to enhance yellow reflection. It is preferably 260 nm or 420 to 450 nm, and it is preferably 260 nm to 290 nm to enhance red reflection, and 90 nm to 120 nm or 290 nm to 320 nm to enhance violet reflection. Preferably, the thickness is 160 nm to 210 nm or 370 nm to 420 nm to enhance green reflection.
 各層の厚みは、加飾フィルムをフィルム表面に垂直な方向で切断し、切断面を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)又は光学顕微鏡で観察し、その範囲での層の厚さを計測する断面観察法、また、加飾フィルム、また剥離可能であれば剥離した層を、ノギスや膜厚計等により直接測定する方法等にて測定することができる。 The thickness of each layer is measured by cutting the decorative film in a direction perpendicular to the film surface, observing the cut surface with a scanning electron microscope (SEM) or an optical microscope, and measuring the thickness of the layer in that range. Alternatively, the decorative film or, if it can be peeled, the peeled layer can be measured by a method of directly measuring with a vernier caliper, a film thickness meter or the like.
〔仮支持体〕
 仮支持体としては、特に制限なく公知の樹脂フィルムが使用され、可撓性を有し、かつ、加圧下、又は、加圧及び加熱下において、著しい変形、収縮又は伸びを生じないフィルムを好適に用いることができる。
 仮支持体としては、シクロオレフィンコポリマーフィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム、ポリメチルメタクリレートフィルム等の樹脂フィルムが好ましく、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムがより好ましい。
 また、仮支持体の着色層からの剥離性が優れる点から、剥離層付き有機フィルムがより好ましい。
 仮支持体の市販品としては、例えば、「ユニピール(登録商標)」シリーズ(ユニチカ(株)製)、「セラピール(登録商標)」シリーズ(東レフィルム加工(株)製)等の剥離層付きPETフィルムなどが挙げられる。
(Temporary support)
As the temporary support, a known resin film is used without any particular limitation, and a film that has flexibility and does not cause significant deformation, shrinkage, or elongation under pressure or under pressure and heat is preferable. Can be used for
As the temporary support, a resin film such as a cycloolefin copolymer film, a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, a polycarbonate film, and a polymethyl methacrylate film is preferable, and a polyethylene terephthalate film is more preferable.
Further, an organic film with a release layer is more preferable in that the release property of the temporary support from the colored layer is excellent.
Commercially available temporary supports include, for example, PET with a release layer such as "Unipeel (registered trademark)" series (manufactured by Unitika Ltd.) and "Therapyel (registered trademark)" series (manufactured by Toray Film Processing Co., Ltd.). Films and the like.
-全光透過率-
 本開示において用いられる仮支持体は、後述する露光工程において仮支持体側から露光を行う場合には、全光透過率が80%以上であることが好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましい。
 全光透過率は、分光光度計(例えば、(株)島津製作所製、分光光度計UV-2100)により測定することができる。
-Total light transmittance-
The temporary support used in the present disclosure has a total light transmittance of preferably 80% or more, and more preferably 90% or more, when exposure is performed from the temporary support side in an exposure step described later.
The total light transmittance can be measured by a spectrophotometer (for example, spectrophotometer UV-2100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation).
〔剥離層〕
 仮支持体は、着色層からの剥離性の向上のため、剥離層を有することが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、仮支持体と着色層との間に、仮支持体と着色層との剥離性の向上のため、剥離層を有することが好ましい。
 更に、本開示に係る加飾フィルムが上記剥離層を有する場合、仮支持体を剥離した際に、仮支持体とともに上記剥離層が着色層から剥がれるものであることが好ましい。
 剥離層としては、特に限定されず、転写フィルム等の分野で公知の剥離層を使用することが可能である。
 剥離層としては、例えば、熱可塑性樹脂を含む層が挙げられ、特許第4502784号公報の段落0026に記載の熱可塑性樹脂層等が剥離層として好適に用いられる。
 仮支持体が剥離層を有する場合、着色層を形成する工程において、着色層は剥離層上に形成されることが好ましい。
(Release layer)
The temporary support preferably has a release layer for improving the releasability from the colored layer.
Further, the decorative film according to the present disclosure preferably has a release layer between the temporary support and the colored layer in order to improve the releasability between the temporary support and the colored layer.
Further, when the decorative film according to the present disclosure has the release layer, it is preferable that when the temporary support is peeled off, the release layer is peeled off from the colored layer together with the temporary support.
The release layer is not particularly limited, and a release layer known in the field of a transfer film or the like can be used.
Examples of the release layer include a layer containing a thermoplastic resin, and a thermoplastic resin layer described in paragraph 0026 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 is preferably used as the release layer.
When the temporary support has a release layer, the colored layer is preferably formed on the release layer in the step of forming the colored layer.
〔着色層〕
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、着色層を有する。
 着色層の色は、特に制限はなく、有色の(無色透明でない)層であればよいが、不透明な着色層(好ましくは全光透過率が10%以下である着色層)であることが好ましい。
 また、着色層は、黒、灰、白、赤、橙、黄、緑、青、紫等、種々の色であればよいが、黒色の着色層であると、反射光の強度が小さく、色変化がより強調されるため、好ましい。
(Coloring layer)
The decorative film according to the present disclosure has a colored layer.
The color of the colored layer is not particularly limited, and may be a colored (not colorless and transparent) layer, but is preferably an opaque colored layer (preferably a colored layer having a total light transmittance of 10% or less). .
Further, the coloring layer may be of various colors such as black, gray, white, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and purple, but if it is a black coloring layer, the intensity of reflected light is small, and This is preferable because the change is more emphasized.
 着色層は、強度、及び、耐傷性の観点から、樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 樹脂としては、後述するパインダー樹脂が好適に挙げられる。
 また、着色層は、重合性化合物を硬化してなる層であってもよく、重合性化合物及び重合開始剤を含む層であってもよいが、保存性、及び、着色層と他の層との密着性の観点から、重合性化合物を硬化してなる層であることが好ましく、ウレタン結合、及び、炭素数2又は3のアルキレンオキシ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の部分構造を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物を少なくとも硬化してなる層であることがより好ましい。
The colored layer preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound from the viewpoints of strength and scratch resistance.
Preferable examples of the resin include a binder resin described below.
Further, the colored layer may be a layer obtained by curing a polymerizable compound, may be a layer containing a polymerizable compound and a polymerization initiator, but storage stability, and, the colored layer and other layers From the viewpoint of adhesion, it is preferably a layer formed by curing a polymerizable compound, and has a urethane bond and at least one kind of partial structure selected from the group consisting of alkyleneoxy groups having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. It is more preferable that the layer is obtained by curing at least a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound.
-着色剤-
 着色層は、視認性の観点から、着色剤を含むことが好ましく、耐久性の観点から、着色剤として、顔料を含むことがより好ましい。
 着色剤としては、特に制限はなく、目的とする色相の着色剤を適宜選択して用いることができる。
 着色剤としては、顔料、染料等が挙げられ、顔料が好ましい。
 また、顔料は、粒子形状の顔料であることが好ましい。
 顔料としては、従来公知の種々の無機顔料及び有機顔料を用いることができる。
 無機顔料としては、例えば、特開2005-7765号公報の段落0015及び段落0114に記載の無機顔料が挙げられる。
 具体的な無機顔料としては、例えば、二酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、リトポン、軽質炭酸カルシウム、ホワイトカーボン、酸化アルミニウム、水酸化アルミニウム、及び硫酸バリウムなどの白色顔料、並びに、カーボンブラック、チタンブラック、チタンカーボン、酸化鉄、及び黒鉛などの黒色顔料が挙げられる。
 例えば、酸化鉄、バリウムイエロー、カドミウムレッド、クロムイエロー、等の公知の有彩色顔料も使用できる。
-Colorant-
The coloring layer preferably contains a coloring agent from the viewpoint of visibility, and more preferably contains a pigment as a coloring agent from the viewpoint of durability.
The colorant is not particularly limited, and a colorant having a desired hue can be appropriately selected and used.
Examples of the colorant include a pigment and a dye, and a pigment is preferable.
Further, the pigment is preferably a particle-shaped pigment.
As the pigment, various conventionally known inorganic pigments and organic pigments can be used.
Examples of the inorganic pigment include the inorganic pigments described in paragraphs 0015 and 0114 of JP-A-2005-7765.
Specific inorganic pigments include, for example, white pigments such as titanium dioxide, zinc oxide, lithopone, light calcium carbonate, white carbon, aluminum oxide, aluminum hydroxide, and barium sulfate; and carbon black, titanium black, and titanium carbon. , Iron oxide, and black pigments such as graphite.
For example, known chromatic pigments such as iron oxide, barium yellow, cadmium red, and chrome yellow can be used.
 有機顔料としては、例えば、特開2009-256572号公報の段落0093に記載の有機顔料が挙げられる。
 具体的な有機顔料としては、例えば、C.I.Pigment Red 177、179、224、242、254、255、264等の赤色顔料、C.I.Pigment Yellow 138、139、150、180、185等の黄色顔料、C.I.Pigment Orange 36、38、71等の橙色顔料、C.I.Pigment Green 7、36、58等の緑色顔料、C.I.Pigment Blue 15:6等の青色顔料、C.I.Pigment Violet 23等の紫色顔料が挙げられる。
 その他、顔料としては、光透過性及び光反射性を有する顔料(所謂、光輝性顔料)の粒子を含んでいてもよい。
 上記光輝性顔料は、後述する露光する工程を含む場合には、露光による硬化を妨げない範囲において用いられることが好ましい。
Examples of the organic pigment include the organic pigments described in paragraph 0093 of JP-A-2009-256572.
Specific examples of the organic pigment include C.I. I. Red pigments such as C.I. Pigment Red 177, 179, 224, 242, 254, 255, 264; I. Pigment Yellow 138, 139, 150, 180, 185, etc .; I. Orange pigments such as C.I. Pigment Orange 36, 38 and 71; I. Green pigments such as CI Pigment Green 7, 36, 58; I. A blue pigment such as C.I. Pigment Blue 15: 6; I. Pigment Violet 23 and the like.
In addition, the pigment may include particles of a pigment having a light transmitting property and a light reflecting property (a so-called brilliant pigment).
In the case where the glitter pigment includes a step of exposing to light described below, it is preferable to use the glitter pigment within a range that does not hinder curing by exposure.
 着色剤は、それぞれ、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。また、無機顔料の粒子と有機顔料の粒子とを併用してもよい。
 着色層中の着色剤の含有量は、目的とする色相の発現(例えば、白化の抑制)、着色層の金型に対する形状追従性の維持等の点から、着色層の全質量に対して、1質量%~50質量%が好ましく、5質量%~50質量%がより好ましく、10質量%~40質量%が更に好ましい。
 ここで、本開示における「白化」とは、着色層が、マット感が付与されたような白っぽい色味を呈するように変化することを指す。
Each of the coloring agents may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, particles of an inorganic pigment and particles of an organic pigment may be used in combination.
The content of the coloring agent in the coloring layer is, with respect to the total mass of the coloring layer, from the viewpoint of the development of the desired hue (for example, suppression of whitening) and the maintenance of the shape following property of the coloring layer to the mold. It is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 50% by mass, and still more preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass.
Here, “whitening” in the present disclosure indicates that the colored layer changes so as to exhibit a whitish color like a matte feeling.
-重合性化合物-
 本開示において用いられる着色層は、重合性化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和基、エポキシ基等が挙げられ、硬化性等の観点から、エチレン性不飽和基が好ましく、(メタ)アクリロキシ基がより好ましい。
 また、重合性基としては、ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。
 重合性化合物としては、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合、炭素数2又は3のアルキレンオキシ基、及び、炭素数6~12の炭化水素基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の部分構造を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物(以下、「特定重合性化合物」ともいう。)が好ましく、ウレタン結合、及び、炭素数2又は3のアルキレンオキサイド基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の部分構造を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物がより好ましい。
 特定重合性化合物においては、部分構造と重合性基との間には、必要に応じて、連結基を有していてもよい。また、特定重合性化合物は、ウレタン結合、ウレア結合、炭素数2又は3のアルキレンオキシ基、及び、炭素数6~12の炭化水素基からなる群より選択される2種以上の部分構造を有していてもよい。
-Polymerizable compound-
The colored layer used in the present disclosure preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
Examples of the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated group and an epoxy group. From the viewpoint of curability and the like, an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable, and a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable.
As the polymerizable group, a radical polymerizable group is preferable.
Examples of the polymerizable compound include bifunctional compounds having at least one partial structure selected from the group consisting of a urethane bond, a urea bond, an alkyleneoxy group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and a hydrocarbon group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. Alternatively, a trifunctional polymerizable compound (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific polymerizable compound”) is preferable, and a urethane bond and at least one partial structure selected from the group consisting of alkylene oxide groups having 2 or 3 carbon atoms are preferable. A bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having the same is more preferable.
The specific polymerizable compound may have a linking group between the partial structure and the polymerizable group, if necessary. The specific polymerizable compound has at least two partial structures selected from the group consisting of a urethane bond, a urea bond, an alkyleneoxy group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms, and a hydrocarbon group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. You may have.
<ウレタン結合を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物>
 ウレタン結合を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物(以下、「特定重合性化合物1」ともいう。)としては、ウレタンオリゴマーが好ましい。
 上記ウレタン結合における窒素原子は、2置換(窒素原子上の基の1つが水素原子)であっても、3置換であってもよい。
 また、特定重合性化合物1は、ウレタン樹脂鎖を有することが好ましい。
 ウレタンオリゴマーとしては、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレートオリゴマーが好ましく、脂肪族系ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート、芳香族系ウレタン(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。
 詳しくは、オリゴマーハンドブック(古川淳二監修、(株)化学工業日報社)を参照することができ、ここに記載のウレタンオリゴマーは、目的に応じて適宜選択し、本工程における着色層の形成に用いることができる。
 特定重合性化合物1であるウレタンオリゴマーの分子量は、800~2,000であることが好ましく、1,000~2,000であることがより好ましい。
<Bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having urethane bond>
As the bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a urethane bond (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific polymerizable compound 1”), a urethane oligomer is preferable.
The nitrogen atom in the urethane bond may be disubstituted (one of the groups on the nitrogen atom is a hydrogen atom) or trisubstituted.
Further, the specific polymerizable compound 1 preferably has a urethane resin chain.
As the urethane oligomer, a urethane (meth) acrylate oligomer is preferable, and examples thereof include an aliphatic urethane (meth) acrylate and an aromatic urethane (meth) acrylate.
For details, reference can be made to an oligomer handbook (supervised by Junji Furukawa, Chemical Daily Co., Ltd.). The urethane oligomer described herein is appropriately selected according to the purpose and used for forming a colored layer in this step. be able to.
The molecular weight of the urethane oligomer as the specific polymerizable compound 1 is preferably from 800 to 2,000, and more preferably from 1,000 to 2,000.
 特定重合性化合物1であるウレタン(メタ)アクリレートオリゴマーとしては、市販品を用いてもよい。
 ウレタン(メタ)アクリレートオリゴマーの市販品としては、例えば、新中村化学工業(株)製のU-2PPA、UA-122P、等;サートマー・ジャパン(株)製のCN964A85、CN964、CN959、CN962、CN963J85、CN965、CN982B88、CN981、CN983、CN991、CN991NS、CN996、CN996NS、CN9002、CN9007、CN9178、CN9893;ダイセル・オルネクス(株)製のEBECRYL230、EBECRYL270、EBECRYL284、EBECRYL4858、EBECRYL210、EBECRYL8402、EBECRYL8804、EBECRYL8800-20R等(以上、商品名)が挙げられる。なお、「EBECRYL」はいずれも登録商標である。
As the urethane (meth) acrylate oligomer which is the specific polymerizable compound 1, a commercially available product may be used.
Commercially available urethane (meth) acrylate oligomers include, for example, U-2PPA and UA-122P manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd .; CN964A85, CN964, CN959, CN962, CN963J85 manufactured by Sartomer Japan K.K. , CN965, CN982B88, CN981, CN983, CN991, CN991NS, CN996, CN996NS, CN9002, CN9007, CN9178, CN9893; Etc. (above, trade names). Note that “EBECRYL” is a registered trademark.
<ウレア結合を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物>>
 ウレア結合を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物(以下、「特定重合性化合物2」ともいう。)としては、ウレア結合を有する2官能又は3官能エチレン性不飽和化合物が挙げられる。
 上記ウレア結合における窒素原子は、2置換(窒素原子上の基の1つが水素原子)であっても、3置換であってもよい。
 また、特定重合性化合物2は、ウレア樹脂鎖を有することが好ましい。
<Bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a urea bond>
Examples of the bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a urea bond (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific polymerizable compound 2”) include a bifunctional or trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a urea bond.
The nitrogen atom in the urea bond may be disubstituted (one of the groups on the nitrogen atom is a hydrogen atom) or trisubstituted.
Further, the specific polymerizable compound 2 preferably has a urea resin chain.
 ウレア結合を有する2官能又は3官能エチレン性不飽和化合物として、具体的には、例えば、エチレン性不飽和基を有するイソシアネート化合物とアミン化合物とを反応させて得られた合成物が挙げられる。
 エチレン性不飽和基を有するイソシアネート化合物としては、例えば、2-メタクリロイルオキシエチルイソシアネート(市販品であれば、昭和電工(株)製のカレンズMOI(登録商標))、2-メタクリロイルオキシエチルイソシアネートのイソシアネート基をメチルエチルケトンオキシムでブロックしたもの(メタクリル酸2-(O-[1’-メチルプロピリデンアミノ]カルボキシアミノ)エチル、市販品であれば、昭和電工(株)製のカレンズMOI-BM(登録商標))、2-メタクリロイルオキシエチルイソシアネートのイソシアネート基をピラゾールでブロックしたもの(2-[(3,5-ジメチルピラゾリル)カルボニルアミノ]エチルメタクリレート、市販品であれば、昭和電工(株)製のカレンズMOI-BP(登録商標))等を用いることができる。
 また、アミン化合物としては、例えば、2つ以上の活性水素原子を有するアミン化合物、具体的には、ジメチルアミン、トリメチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、ジイソプロピルアミン、ジエチレントリアミン、トリエチレンテトラミン等を用いることができる。
 なお、特定重合性化合物2は、この方法により得られるものに限定されない。
Specific examples of the bifunctional or trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a urea bond include, for example, a synthetic product obtained by reacting an isocyanate compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group with an amine compound.
Examples of the isocyanate compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group include 2-methacryloyloxyethyl isocyanate (a commercially available product, Karenz MOI (registered trademark) manufactured by Showa Denko KK), and isocyanate of 2-methacryloyloxyethyl isocyanate. Having a group blocked with methyl ethyl ketone oxime (2- (O- [1′-methylpropylideneamino] carboxyamino) ethyl methacrylate; commercially available product, Karenz MOI-BM (registered trademark) manufactured by Showa Denko KK )), 2-methacryloyloxyethyl isocyanate in which the isocyanate group is blocked with pyrazole (2-[(3,5-dimethylpyrazolyl) carbonylamino] ethyl methacrylate; if it is a commercial product, Karenz manufactured by Showa Denko KK MOI-BP (registered merchant Mark)) can be used.
In addition, as the amine compound, for example, an amine compound having two or more active hydrogen atoms, specifically, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, triethylamine, diisopropylamine, diethylenetriamine, triethylenetetramine, or the like can be used.
In addition, the specific polymerizable compound 2 is not limited to a compound obtained by this method.
 特定重合性化合物2の具体例としては、エトキシ化イソシアヌル酸ジアクリレート、エトキシ化イソシアヌル酸トリアクリレート、ε-カプロラクトン変性トリス(2-アクリロキシエチル)イソシアヌレート等が挙げられる。
 ここで、エトキシ化イソシアヌル酸ジアクリレート、エトキシ化イソシアヌル酸トリアクリレート、及び、ε-カプロラクトン変性トリス(2-アクリロキシエチル)イソシアヌレートは、エチレンオキシ基を有する化合物でもある。
Specific examples of the specific polymerizable compound 2 include ethoxylated isocyanuric acid diacrylate, ethoxylated isocyanuric acid triacrylate, and ε-caprolactone-modified tris (2-acryloxyethyl) isocyanurate.
Here, ethoxylated isocyanuric acid diacrylate, ethoxylated isocyanuric acid triacrylate, and ε-caprolactone-modified tris (2-acryloxyethyl) isocyanurate are also compounds having an ethyleneoxy group.
 特定重合性化合物2は、市販品として入手可能である。
 市販品の具体例としては、例えば、新中村化学工業(株)製のNKエステルA-9300、A-9300-1CL;東亞合成(株)製のアロニックス(登録商標)M-215、313、315(以上、商品名)等を挙げることができる。
The specific polymerizable compound 2 is available as a commercial product.
Specific examples of commercially available products include, for example, NK esters A-9300 and A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd .; (The above is a trade name).
<炭素数2又は3のアルキレンオキシ基を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物>
 炭素数2又は3のアルキレンオキシ基(「アルキレンオキサイド基」ともいう。)を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物(以下、「特定重合性化合物3」ともいう。)は、1分子内に、例えば、エチレンオキシ基又はプロピレンオキシ基を1つ以上有し、かつ、重合性基を分子末端に2つ又は3つ有する。
 プロピレンオキシ基は、-CH-CH-CH-O-、-CH-CH(CH)O-又は-CH(CH)-CHO-が挙げられ、-CH-CH(CH)O-又は-CH(CH)-CHO-であることが好ましい。
 ここで、特定重合性化合物3における重合性基としては、例えば、アクリロイルオキシ基、アクリロイル基、メタクリロイルオキシ基及びメタクリロイル基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種のエチレン性不飽和基が挙げられる。
<Bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms>
A bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms (also referred to as “alkylene oxide group”) (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific polymerizable compound 3”) has one molecule. For example, it has one or more ethyleneoxy groups or propyleneoxy groups, and has two or three polymerizable groups at the molecular terminals.
The propyleneoxy group includes —CH 2 —CH 2 —CH 2 —O—, —CH 2 —CH (CH 3 ) O— or —CH (CH 3 ) —CH 2 O—, and —CH 2 —CH It is preferably (CH 3 ) O— or —CH (CH 3 ) —CH 2 O—.
Here, examples of the polymerizable group in the specific polymerizable compound 3 include at least one ethylenically unsaturated group selected from the group consisting of an acryloyloxy group, an acryloyl group, a methacryloyloxy group, and a methacryloyl group.
 特定重合性化合物3の具体例としては、エチレングリコールジアクリレート、エチレングリコールジメタクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールジアクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、エトキシ化ビスフェノールAジアクリレート、エトキシ化ビスフェノールAジメタクリレート、エトキシ化トリメチロールプロパントリアクリレート、エトキシ化トリメチロールプロパントリメタクリレート、エトキシ化グリセリントリアクリレート、エトキシ化グリセリントリメタクリレート等が挙げられる。
 これらの化合物が有するエチレンオキシ基又はプロピレンオキシ基の数は、金型に対する形状追従性がより良好となるという観点から、3以上が好ましく、9~40がより好ましく、15~30が特に好ましい。
Specific examples of the specific polymerizable compound 3 include ethylene glycol diacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, polyethylene glycol diacrylate, polyethylene glycol dimethacrylate, ethoxylated bisphenol A diacrylate, ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylate, and ethoxylated trimethylolpropane. Examples include triacrylate, ethoxylated trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate, and ethoxylated glycerin trimethacrylate.
The number of ethyleneoxy groups or propyleneoxy groups contained in these compounds is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 9 to 40, and particularly preferably 15 to 30, from the viewpoint that the shape following property with respect to the mold becomes better.
 また、金型に対する形状追従性が更に良好となる観点から、特定重合性化合物3は、エチレンオキシ基又はプロピレンオキシ基を2つ以上繰り返して有する、ポリエチレンオキシ基又はポリプロピレンオキシ基を有することが好ましい。ポリエチレンオキシ基又はポリプロピレンオキシ基におけるエチレンオキシ基又はプロピレンオキシ基の繰り返し数は、3以上であることが好ましく、5以上であることが特に好ましい。 In addition, from the viewpoint of further improving the shape following property to the mold, the specific polymerizable compound 3 preferably has a polyethyleneoxy group or a polypropyleneoxy group having two or more ethyleneoxy groups or propyleneoxy groups. . The repeating number of the ethyleneoxy group or the propyleneoxy group in the polyethyleneoxy group or the polypropyleneoxy group is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more.
 特定重合性化合物3は、市販品として入手が可能である。
 市販品の具体例としては、例えば、新中村化学工業(株)製のNKエステルA-200、A-400、A-600、A-1000、1G、2G、3G、4G、9G、14G、23G、ABE-300、A-BPE-4、A-BPE-6、A-BPE-10、A-BPE-20、A-BPE-30、BPE-80N、BPE-100N、BPE-200、BPE-500、BPE-900、BPE-1300N、A-GLY-3E、A-GLY-9E、A-GLY-20E、A-TMPT-3EO、A-TMPT-9EO;日本化薬(株)製のPEG400DA;東亞合成(株)製のアロニックス(登録商標)M-220、M-350;サートマー・ジャパン(株)製のSR415、SR454、SR9035(以上、商品名)等を挙げることができる。
Specific polymerizable compound 3 is available as a commercial product.
Specific examples of commercially available products include, for example, NK esters A-200, A-400, A-600, A-1000, 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G, 9G, 14G, 23G manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd. , ABE-300, A-BPE-4, A-BPE-6, A-BPE-10, A-BPE-20, A-BPE-30, BPE-80N, BPE-100N, BPE-200, BPE-500 , BPE-900, BPE-1300N, A-GLY-3E, A-GLY-9E, A-GLY-20E, A-TMPT-3EO, A-TMPT-9EO; PEG400DA manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd .; Aronix (registered trademark) M-220, M-350 manufactured by Gosei Co., Ltd .; SR415, SR454, SR9035 (manufactured by Sartomer Japan Co., Ltd. (trade names)) and the like. It can be.
<炭素数6~12の炭化水素基を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物>>
 炭素数6~12の炭化水素基を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物(以下、「特定重合性化合物4」ともいう。)は、炭素数が6~12であって、鎖状、環状、分岐状のいずれかの炭化水素基と、2つ又は3つの重合性基と、を有する。
 ここで、特定重合性化合物4における炭化水素基としては、具体的には、炭素数6~12の炭化水素鎖であり、直鎖でも、分岐があってもよい。
 中でも、金型に対する形状追従性がより良好となるという観点から、炭化水素基としては、直鎖のものが好ましい。
 また、重合性基としては、重合性基としては、例えば、アクリロイルオキシ基、アクリロイル基、メタクリロイルオキシ基及びメタクリロイル基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種のエチレン性不飽和基が挙げられる。
<Bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a hydrocarbon group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms >>
A bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a hydrocarbon group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific polymerizable compound 4”) has 6 to 12 carbon atoms and has a chain shape, a cyclic shape, It has any of the branched hydrocarbon groups and two or three polymerizable groups.
Here, the hydrocarbon group in the specific polymerizable compound 4 is specifically a hydrocarbon chain having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, which may be linear or branched.
Among them, a linear hydrocarbon group is preferable as the hydrocarbon group from the viewpoint that the shape following property with respect to the mold becomes better.
The polymerizable group includes, for example, at least one ethylenically unsaturated group selected from the group consisting of an acryloyloxy group, an acryloyl group, a methacryloyloxy group, and a methacryloyl group.
 特定重合性化合物4の具体例としては、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,7-ヘプタンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,8-オクタンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,4-シクロヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレート、水添ビスフェノールAのジ(メタ)アクリレート、水添ビスフェノールFのジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 上記化合物の中でも、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートが好ましく用いられる。
Specific examples of the specific polymerizable compound 4 include 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,7-heptanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,8-octanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9 -Nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,4-cyclohexanediol di (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, hydrogenated bisphenol A di- (Meth) acrylate and di (meth) acrylate of hydrogenated bisphenol F are mentioned.
Among the above compounds, tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) Acrylate and neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate are preferably used.
 重合性化合物としては、加熱時の柔軟性が高められること等により、立体成型性を向上させる観点から、ウレタン結合及び炭素数2又は3のアルキレンオキサイド基よりなる群より選択される少なくとも一種の部分構造を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物であることが好ましい。 As the polymerizable compound, at least one portion selected from the group consisting of a urethane bond and an alkylene oxide group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of improving three-dimensional moldability, for example, by increasing flexibility upon heating. It is preferably a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a structure.
 着色層は、特定重合性化合物以外の、その他の重合性化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 その他の重合性化合物としては、特定重合性化合物と同様の重合性基を含む化合物であれば、特に制限なく用いることができる。
The coloring layer may contain other polymerizable compounds other than the specific polymerizable compound.
As the other polymerizable compound, any compound having the same polymerizable group as the specific polymerizable compound can be used without particular limitation.
 重合性化合物の含有量は、層間密着性の向上、着色層の柔軟性付与の点から、未硬化の着色層の全質量に対して、10質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、20質量%~40質量%であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the polymerizable compound is preferably from 10% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the uncured colored layer, from the viewpoint of improving interlayer adhesion and imparting flexibility to the colored layer. More preferably, it is from 40% by mass to 40% by mass.
 特定重合性化合物及びその他の重合性化合物は、それぞれ、1種のみを単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。 As the specific polymerizable compound and the other polymerizable compound, only one kind may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be used in combination.
 本開示において用いられる重合性化合物は、それぞれ、分子量(分子量分布を有する場合は重量平均分子量)が200~3,000であることが好ましく、250~2,600であることがより好ましく、280~2,200であることが特に好ましい。 Each of the polymerizable compounds used in the present disclosure preferably has a molecular weight (weight average molecular weight when having a molecular weight distribution) of 200 to 3,000, more preferably 250 to 2,600, and more preferably 280 to 2,000. Particularly preferred is 2,200.
-分散剤-
 着色層に含まれる顔料の分散性を向上する観点から、着色層は、分散剤を含有してもよい。
 分散剤を含むことにより、形成される着色層における顔料の分散性が向上し、得られる加飾フィルムにおける色相の均一化が図れる。
-Dispersant-
From the viewpoint of improving the dispersibility of the pigment contained in the coloring layer, the coloring layer may contain a dispersant.
By including a dispersant, the dispersibility of the pigment in the formed colored layer is improved, and the hue of the obtained decorative film can be made uniform.
 分散剤としては、顔料の種類、形状などに応じて適宜選択して用いることができるが、高分子分散剤であることが好ましい。
 高分子分散剤としては、シリコーンポリマー、アクリルポリマー、ポリエステルポリマー等が挙げられる。
 加飾フィルムに耐熱性を付与したい場合には、例えば、分散剤として、グラフト型シリコーンポリマー等のシリコーンポリマーを用いることが好適である。
The dispersant can be appropriately selected and used according to the type and shape of the pigment, and is preferably a polymer dispersant.
Examples of the polymer dispersant include a silicone polymer, an acrylic polymer, and a polyester polymer.
When it is desired to impart heat resistance to the decorative film, for example, it is preferable to use a silicone polymer such as a graft-type silicone polymer as the dispersant.
 分散剤の重量平均分子量としては、1,000~5,000,000であることが好ましく、2,000~3,000,000であることがより好ましく、2,500~3,000,000であることが特に好ましい。重量平均分子量が1,000以上であると、顔料の分散性がより向上する。 The weight average molecular weight of the dispersant is preferably from 1,000 to 5,000,000, more preferably from 2,000 to 3,000,000, and more preferably from 2,500 to 3,000,000. It is particularly preferred that there is. When the weight average molecular weight is 1,000 or more, the dispersibility of the pigment is further improved.
 分散剤としては、市販品を用いてもよい。市販品としては、BASFジャパン社のEFKA 4300(アクリル系高分子分散剤)、花王(株)製のホモゲノールL-18、ホモゲノールL-95、ホモゲノールL-100、日本ルーブリゾール(株)製の、ソルスパース20000、ソルスパース24000、ビックケミー・ジャパン(株)製の、DISPERBYK-110、DISPERBYK-164、DISPERBYK-180、DISPERBYK-182等が挙げられる。
 なお、「ホモゲノール」、「ソルスパース」、及び「DISPERBYK」はいずれも登録商標である。
Commercial products may be used as the dispersant. Commercially available products include EFKA 4300 (acrylic polymer dispersant) from BASF Japan, Homogenol L-18, Homogenol L-95, and Homogenol L-100 from Kao Corporation; Solsperse 20000, Solsperse 24000, DISPERBYK-110, DISPERBYK-164, DISPERBYK-180, DISPERBYK-182, etc., manufactured by BYK Japan KK.
“Homogenol”, “Solsperse”, and “DISPERBYK” are all registered trademarks.
 着色層が分散剤を含む場合、分散剤は、1種のみを含んでもよく、2種以上を含んでもよい。
 分散剤の含有量は、着色剤100質量部に対して、1質量部~30質量部であることが好ましい。
When the coloring layer contains a dispersant, the dispersant may contain only one kind or two or more kinds.
The content of the dispersant is preferably 1 part by mass to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the colorant.
-重合開始剤-
 着色層は、硬化感度を上げ、層間密着性を更に向上させるため、重合開始剤を含むことが好ましく、重合性化合物及び重合開始剤を含むことがより好ましい。
 重合開始剤としては、露光に対する感度を高める点から、光重合開始剤が好ましい。
 光重合開始剤としては、特開2011-95716号公報の段落0031~0042に記載の重合開始剤、特開2015-014783号公報の段落0064~0081に記載のオキシム系重合開始剤を用いることができる。
-Polymerization initiator-
The colored layer preferably contains a polymerization initiator, and more preferably contains a polymerizable compound and a polymerization initiator, in order to increase curing sensitivity and further improve interlayer adhesion.
As the polymerization initiator, a photopolymerization initiator is preferable from the viewpoint of increasing the sensitivity to exposure.
As the photopolymerization initiator, a polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0031 to 0042 of JP-A-2011-95716 and an oxime-based polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0064 to 0081 of JP-A-2015-014783 may be used. it can.
 光重合開始剤として具体的には、例えば、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)]-1,2-オクタンジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(例えば、IRGACURE(登録商標)OXE-01、BASF社製)、[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]エタン-1-オン-1-(O-アセチルオキシム)(例えば、IRGACURE(登録商標)OXE-02、BASF社製)、2-(ジメチルアミノ)-2-[(4-メチルフェニル)メチル]-1-[4-(4-モルホリニル)フェニル]-1-ブタノン(例えば、IRGACURE(登録商標)379EG、BASF社製)、2-メチル-1-(4-メチルチオフェニル)-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン(例えば、IRGACURE(登録商標)907、BASF社製)、2-ヒドロキシ-1-{4-[4-(2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチルプロピオニル)ベンジル]フェニル}-2-メチル-プロパン-1-オン(例えば、IRGACURE(登録商標)127、BASF社製)、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)ブタノン-1(例えば、IRGACURE(登録商標)369、BASF社製)、2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン(例えば、IRGACURE(登録商標)1173、BASF社製)、1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン(例えば、IRGACURE(登録商標)184、BASF社製)、2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン(例えば、IRGACURE(登録商標)651、BASF社製)、オキシムエステル系重合開始剤である商品名:Lunar 6(DKSHジャパン(株)製)、2,4-ジエチルチオキサントン(例えば、カヤキュアDETX-S、日本化薬(株)製)、フルオレンオキシム系重合開始剤であるDFI-091、DFI-020(ともにダイトーケミックス社製)が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator include, for example, 1- [4- (phenylthio)]-1,2-octanedione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (eg, IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE-01, BASF [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazol-3-yl] ethane-1-one-1- (O-acetyloxime) (for example, IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE- 02, manufactured by BASF), 2- (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone (for example, IRGACURE®) 379EG, manufactured by BASF), 2-methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropan-1-one (for example, IRGACURE (Registered trademark) 907, manufactured by BASF), 2-hydroxy-1- {4- [4- (2-hydroxy-2-methylpropionyl) benzyl] phenyl} -2-methyl-propan-1-one (for example, IRGACURE (Registered trademark) 127, manufactured by BASF), 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) butanone-1 (for example, IRGACURE® 369, manufactured by BASF), 2-hydroxy 2-methyl-1-phenylpropan-1-one (eg, IRGACURE® 1173, manufactured by BASF), 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone (eg, IRGACURE® 184, manufactured by BASF), 2 , 2-Dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethan-1-one (eg, IRGACU E (registered trademark) 651, manufactured by BASF), trade names of oxime ester-based polymerization initiators: Lunar # 6 (manufactured by DKSH Japan), 2,4-diethylthioxanthone (for example, Kayacure DETX-S, Nippon Kagaku) And Fluorene oxime-based polymerization initiators DFI-091 and DFI-020 (both manufactured by Daito Chemmix).
 中でも、トリクロロメチルトリアジン系化合物などのハロゲン含有重合開始剤以外の他の開始剤を用いることが硬化感度を高める観点から好ましく、α-アミノアルキルフェノン系化合物、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン系化合物、オキシムエステル系化合物などのオキシム系重合開始剤がより好ましい。 Among them, it is preferable to use an initiator other than a halogen-containing polymerization initiator such as a trichloromethyltriazine-based compound from the viewpoint of increasing the curing sensitivity, and α-aminoalkylphenone-based compounds, α-hydroxyalkylphenone-based compounds, oxime esters An oxime-based polymerization initiator such as a compound is more preferred.
 重合開始剤の含有量は、重合性化合物100質量部に対し、0.1質量部~15質量部であることが好ましく、0.5質量部~10質量部であることがより好ましい。 (4) The content of the polymerization initiator is preferably from 0.1 to 15 parts by mass, more preferably from 0.5 to 10 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
-バインダー樹脂-
 着色層は、着色層の硬化収縮を低減させる等の観点から、バインダー樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
 バインダー樹脂としては、特に制限されず、公知の樹脂を適宜選択できる。バインダー樹脂としては、目的とする色相を得る点から、透明な樹脂であることが好ましく、具体的には、全光透過率が80%以上の樹脂が好ましい。
 全光透過率は、分光光度計(例えば、(株)島津製作所製、分光光度計UV-2100)により測定することができる。
-Binder resin-
The colored layer preferably contains a binder resin from the viewpoint of reducing curing shrinkage of the colored layer.
The binder resin is not particularly limited, and a known resin can be appropriately selected. The binder resin is preferably a transparent resin from the viewpoint of obtaining a desired hue, and specifically, a resin having a total light transmittance of 80% or more is preferable.
The total light transmittance can be measured by a spectrophotometer (for example, spectrophotometer UV-2100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation).
 バインダー樹脂としては、例えば、アクリル樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、及び、オレフィン樹脂が挙げられる。
 中でも、透明性の観点から、アクリル樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、又は、ポリエステル樹脂が好ましく、アクリル樹脂、又は、シリコーン樹脂がより好ましい。更に、耐熱性の観点からは、シリコーン樹脂が好ましい。
Examples of the binder resin include an acrylic resin, a silicone resin, a polyester resin, a urethane resin, and an olefin resin.
Above all, from the viewpoint of transparency, an acrylic resin, a silicone resin, or a polyester resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin or a silicone resin is more preferable. Further, from the viewpoint of heat resistance, a silicone resin is preferable.
 本開示において「アクリル樹脂」とは、(メタ)アクリロイル基を有するアクリルモノマーに由来する構成単位を含む樹脂を指す。(メタ)アクリロイル基とは、メタクリロイル基及びアクリロイル基を包含する概念である。
 アクリル樹脂には、例えば、アクリル酸の単独重合体、メタクリル酸の単独重合体、アクリル酸エステルの単独重合体、メタクリル酸エステルの単独重合体、アクリル酸と他のモノマーとの共重合体、メタクリル酸と他のモノマーとの共重合体、アクリル酸エステルと他のモノマーとの共重合体、メタクリル酸エステルと他のモノマーとの共重合体、ウレタン骨格を側鎖に有するウレタン変性の共重合体などが包含される。
 アクリル樹脂としては、シクロヘキシルメタクリレート/メチルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体のグリシジルメタクリレート付加物、ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸のランダム共重合体、アリルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸の共重合体、ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸/ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートの共重合体などが挙げられる。
In the present disclosure, “acrylic resin” refers to a resin containing a structural unit derived from an acrylic monomer having a (meth) acryloyl group. The (meth) acryloyl group is a concept including a methacryloyl group and an acryloyl group.
Acrylic resins include, for example, homopolymers of acrylic acid, homopolymers of methacrylic acid, homopolymers of acrylates, homopolymers of methacrylates, copolymers of acrylic acid with other monomers, methacrylic Copolymer of acid and other monomer, copolymer of acrylate and other monomer, copolymer of methacrylate and other monomer, urethane-modified copolymer having urethane skeleton in side chain Etc. are included.
Examples of the acrylic resin include a glycidyl methacrylate adduct of cyclohexyl methacrylate / methyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, a random copolymer of benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid, a copolymer of allyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid, and benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid / hydroxyl. Ethyl methacrylate copolymers and the like can be mentioned.
 シリコーン樹脂としては、公知のシリコーン樹脂を用いることができ、例えば、メチル系ストレートシリコーン樹脂、メチルフェニル系ストレートシリコーン樹脂、アクリル樹脂変性シリコーン樹脂、エステル樹脂変性シリコーン樹脂、エポキシ樹脂変性シリコーン樹脂、アルキッド樹脂変性シリコーン樹脂及びゴム系のシリコーン樹脂が挙げられる。
 中でも、メチル系ストレートシリコーン樹脂、メチルフェニル系ストレートシリコーン樹脂、アクリル樹脂変性シリコーン樹脂、又は、ゴム系のシリコーン樹脂が好ましく、メチル系ストレートシリコーン樹脂、メチルフェニル系ストレートシリコーン樹脂、又は、ゴム系のシリコーン樹脂がより好ましい。
As the silicone resin, a known silicone resin can be used. For example, a methyl straight silicone resin, a methylphenyl straight silicone resin, an acrylic resin-modified silicone resin, an ester resin-modified silicone resin, an epoxy resin-modified silicone resin, an alkyd resin Modified silicone resins and rubber-based silicone resins are mentioned.
Among them, methyl straight silicone resin, methylphenyl straight silicone resin, acrylic resin modified silicone resin, or rubber silicone resin is preferable, and methyl straight silicone resin, methylphenyl straight silicone resin, or rubber silicone is preferable. Resins are more preferred.
 シリコーン樹脂は市販品を用いてもよく、市販品としては、信越化学工業(株)製のKR-300、KR-311、KR-251、X-40-2406M、KR-282等が挙げられる。 A commercially available silicone resin may be used. Examples of the commercially available products include KR-300, KR-311, KR-251, X-40-2406M, and KR-282 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
 ポリエステル樹脂としては、例えば、芳香族二塩基酸又はそのエステル形成性誘導体とジオール又はそのエステル形成性誘導体とから合成される線状飽和ポリエステルが挙げられる。
 線状飽和ポリエステルの具体例としては、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンイソフタレート、ポリブチレンテレフタレート、ポリ(1,4-シクロヘキシレンジメチレンテレフタレート)、ポリエチレン-2,6-ナフタレートなどが挙げられる。
Examples of the polyester resin include a linear saturated polyester synthesized from an aromatic dibasic acid or an ester-forming derivative thereof and a diol or an ester-forming derivative thereof.
Specific examples of the linear saturated polyester include polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene isophthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, poly (1,4-cyclohexylene dimethylene terephthalate), and polyethylene-2,6-naphthalate.
 バインダー樹脂の含有量は、着色層の硬化収縮を低減させる点から、着色層の全質量に対して、5質量%~70質量%が好ましく、10質量%~60質量%がより好ましく、20質量%以上60質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、特定重合性化合物を含む重合性化合物の総量に対するバインダー樹脂の総量の割合、即ち、重合性化合物の総量/バインダー樹脂の総量は、0.3~1.5が好ましく、0.5~1.0がより好ましい。
The content of the binder resin is preferably 5% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 60% by mass, and more preferably 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the colored layer, from the viewpoint of reducing the curing shrinkage of the colored layer. % Or more and 60% by mass is more preferable.
Further, the ratio of the total amount of the binder resin to the total amount of the polymerizable compound containing the specific polymerizable compound, that is, the total amount of the polymerizable compound / the total amount of the binder resin is preferably from 0.3 to 1.5, more preferably from 0.5 to 1 .0 is more preferred.
-その他の成分-
 着色層は、上記の成分以外にも、必要に応じて添加剤を含んでいてもよい。
 添加剤としては、公知の添加剤を用いることができ、例えば、特許第4502784号公報の段落0017、特開2009-237362号公報の段落0060~0071に記載の界面活性剤、特許第4502784号公報の段落0018に記載の熱重合防止剤(重合禁止剤ともいう。好ましくはフェノチアジン)、更に、特開2000-310706号公報の段落0058~0071に記載のその他の添加剤が挙げられる。
-Other components-
The coloring layer may contain additives in addition to the above components, if necessary.
As the additives, known additives can be used. For example, paragraphs 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784, surfactants described in paragraphs 0060 to 0071 of JP-A-2009-237362, and Japanese Patent No. 4502784. And the other additives described in paragraphs 0058 to 0071 of JP-A-2000-310706.
-着色層の形成-
 着色層の形成方法は、特に制限はないが、着色層形成用組成物を用いて形成することが好ましい。
 着色層形成用組成物は、着色剤を含み、着色剤及び有機溶剤を含むことが好ましい。
 また、着色層形成用組成物は、上述した他の成分を更に含んでもよい。
 着色層形成用組成物は、例えば、有機溶剤と、着色剤等の着色層に含まれる成分と、を混合することにより調製することができる。
 着色層に含まれる成分の含有量については、着色層の全質量に対する含有量(質量%)として記載されているが、これらの成分が着色層形成用組成物に含まれる場合、その含有量を、着色層形成用組成物の全固形分に対する含有量(質量%)と読み替えるものとする。
-Formation of colored layer-
The method for forming the colored layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably formed using a composition for forming a colored layer.
The composition for forming a colored layer contains a coloring agent, and preferably contains a coloring agent and an organic solvent.
Further, the composition for forming a colored layer may further include other components described above.
The composition for forming a colored layer can be prepared, for example, by mixing an organic solvent and a component contained in the colored layer such as a coloring agent.
The content of the components contained in the colored layer is described as the content (% by mass) based on the total mass of the colored layer. , The content (% by mass) based on the total solid content of the composition for forming a colored layer.
 また、着色層形成用組成物が着色剤として顔料を含む場合、予め、顔料とその分散剤とを含む顔料分散液を調製しておき、この顔料分散液を用いて、着色層形成用組成物を調製することが、顔料の均一分散性、及び、分散安定性をより高める観点から好ましい。 When the composition for forming a colored layer contains a pigment as a colorant, a pigment dispersion containing the pigment and the dispersant is prepared in advance, and the composition for forming a colored layer is prepared using the pigment dispersion. Is preferred from the viewpoint of further improving the uniform dispersibility of the pigment and the dispersion stability.
 着色層形成用組成物は、上記方法により予め調製したものを使用してもよいし、市販品等を使用してもよいし、塗布の直前に着色層形成用組成物を調製してもよい。 The composition for forming a colored layer may be one prepared in advance by the above method, a commercially available product, or the like, or the composition for forming a colored layer may be prepared immediately before application. .
<有機溶剤>
 有機溶剤としては、通常用いられる有機溶剤を特に制限なく用いることができる。具体的には、例えば、エステル類、エーテル類、ケトン類、芳香族炭化水素類等の有機溶剤が挙げられる。
 また、米国特許出願公開第2005/282073号明細書の段落0054、0055に記載のSolventと同様のメチルエチルケトン、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、シクロヘキサノン、シクロヘキサノール、メチルイソブチルケトン、乳酸エチル、乳酸メチル等も、着色層形成用組成物における有機溶剤として好適に用いることができる。
 中でも、1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテート、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(エチルカルビトールアセテート)、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート(ブチルカルビトールアセテート)、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート、メチルエチルケトン等が着色層形成用組成物における有機溶剤として好ましく用いられる。
 これらの有機溶剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 また、有機溶剤の含有量は、特に制限はないが、着色層形成用組成物(塗布液)の全質量に対して、5質量%~90質量%が好ましく、30質量%~70質量%がより好ましい。
<Organic solvent>
As the organic solvent, a commonly used organic solvent can be used without any particular limitation. Specific examples include organic solvents such as esters, ethers, ketones, and aromatic hydrocarbons.
Also, methyl ethyl ketone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, cyclohexanone, cyclohexanol, methyl isobutyl ketone, ethyl lactate similar to Solvent described in paragraphs 0054 and 0055 of US Patent Application Publication No. 2005/282073. Methyl lactate and the like can also be suitably used as the organic solvent in the composition for forming a colored layer.
Among them, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, diethylene glycol mono Ethyl ether acetate (ethyl carbitol acetate), diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate (butyl carbitol acetate), propylene glycol methyl ether acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, and the like are preferably used as the organic solvent in the composition for forming a colored layer.
These organic solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the organic solvent is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass based on the total mass of the colored layer forming composition (coating solution). More preferred.
〔色変化層A〕
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含む色変化層Aを有し、上記色変化層Aは、上記色変化層Bよりも屈折率が0.1以上高い層である。
[Color changing layer A]
The decorative film according to the present disclosure has a color change layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, and the color change layer A is more than the color change layer B. This is a layer having a refractive index higher than 0.1.
 上記色変化層Aは、バインダーとして、樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含み、耐傷性の観点から、樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
 樹脂としては、耐傷性の観点から、熱硬化性樹脂、及び、光硬化性樹脂よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
 熱硬化性樹脂としては、シロキサン樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、フェノール樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、不飽和/飽和ポリエステル、ポリイミドが挙げられる。シロキサン樹脂としては、2官能~4官能のアルコキシシランの加水分解縮合物等が挙げられる。架橋エポキシ樹脂としては、2つ以上の重合性エポキシ基を有する化合物と架橋剤を重合して形成される樹脂等が挙げられる。
 光硬化性樹脂としては、重合性基を有する架橋アクリル樹脂が挙げられる。なお、架橋アクリル樹脂とは、2つ以上の重合性(メタ)アクリレート基を有する化合物を重合して形成される樹脂をいう。
The color change layer A contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound as a binder, and preferably contains a resin from the viewpoint of scratch resistance.
From the viewpoint of scratch resistance, the resin preferably contains at least one resin selected from the group consisting of a thermosetting resin and a photocurable resin.
Examples of the thermosetting resin include a siloxane resin, an epoxy resin, a phenol resin, a melamine resin, a urethane resin, an unsaturated / saturated polyester, and a polyimide. Examples of the siloxane resin include a hydrolytic condensate of a bifunctional to tetrafunctional alkoxysilane. Examples of the crosslinked epoxy resin include a resin formed by polymerizing a compound having two or more polymerizable epoxy groups and a crosslinking agent.
Examples of the photocurable resin include a crosslinked acrylic resin having a polymerizable group. The crosslinked acrylic resin refers to a resin formed by polymerizing a compound having two or more polymerizable (meth) acrylate groups.
 重合性化合物としては、特に制限はなく、公知のモノマー、オリゴマー等を用いることができる。また、重合性化合物としては、上述した着色層における重合性化合物を好適に用いることができる。
 また、重合性化合物としては、耐傷性の観点から、多官能重合性化合物を少なくとも含むことが好ましい。
 多官能重合性化合物としては、特に制限はなく、公知のものを用いることができるが、多官能アクリルモノマー、多官能アクリルオリゴマー、多官能ウレタンアクリレート等が好ましく挙げられる。
 更に、重合性化合物としては、耐傷性の観点から、エチレン性不飽和化合物が好ましく、(メタ)アクリレート化合物がより好ましい。
 また、上記色変化層Aは、耐傷性の観点から、樹脂として、重合性化合物を重合してなる樹脂を含むことが好ましく、多官能重合性化合物を少なくとも重合してなる樹脂を含むことがより好ましく、多官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を少なくとも重合してなる樹脂を含むことが更に好ましく、多官能(メタ)アクリレート化合物を少なくとも重合してなる樹脂を含むことが特に好ましい。
There is no particular limitation on the polymerizable compound, and known monomers and oligomers can be used. Further, as the polymerizable compound, the above-described polymerizable compound in the colored layer can be suitably used.
Further, the polymerizable compound preferably contains at least a polyfunctional polymerizable compound from the viewpoint of scratch resistance.
The polyfunctional polymerizable compound is not particularly limited, and a known compound can be used. Preferred examples thereof include a polyfunctional acrylic monomer, a polyfunctional acrylic oligomer, and a polyfunctional urethane acrylate.
Further, as the polymerizable compound, from the viewpoint of scratch resistance, an ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferable, and a (meth) acrylate compound is more preferable.
Further, from the viewpoint of scratch resistance, the color change layer A preferably contains, as a resin, a resin obtained by polymerizing a polymerizable compound, and more preferably contains a resin obtained by polymerizing at least a polyfunctional polymerizable compound. Preferably, a resin obtained by polymerizing at least a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is contained, and particularly preferably, a resin obtained by polymerizing at least a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compound is contained.
 上記色変化層Aは、重合性化合物を含む場合、硬化性、及び、耐傷性の観点から、重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。
 重合開始剤としては、上記着色層において上述したものを好適に用いることができる。
When the color change layer A contains a polymerizable compound, it is preferable to contain a polymerization initiator from the viewpoint of curability and scratch resistance.
As the polymerization initiator, those described above in the colored layer can be suitably used.
 また、上記色変化層Aは、耐傷性の観点から、ハードコート性を有していることが好ましい。
 ハードコート性を有する材料としては、例えば、特開2013-45045号公報、特開2013-43352号公報、特開2012-232459号公報、特開2012-128157号公報、特開2011-131409号公報、特開2011-131404号公報、特開2011-126162号公報、特開2011-75705号公報、特開2009-286981号公報、特開2009-263567号公報、特開2009-75248号公報、特開2007-164206号公報、特開2006-96811号公報、特開2004-75970号公報、特開2002-156505号公報、特開2001-272503号公報、国際公開第2012/018087号、国際公開第2012/098967号、国際公開第2012/086659号、国際公開第2011/105594号に記載のハードコート層の作製に使用する材料を用いることができる。
The color change layer A preferably has a hard coat property from the viewpoint of scratch resistance.
Examples of the material having a hard coat property include, for example, JP-A-2013-45045, JP-A-2013-43352, JP-A-2012-232524, JP-A-2012-128157, and JP-A-2011-131409. JP-A-2011-131404, JP-A-2011-126162, JP-A-2011-75705, JP-A-2009-286981, JP-A-2009-263567, JP-A-2009-75248, JP-A-2007-164206, JP-A-2006-96811, JP-A-2004-75970, JP-A-2002-156505, JP-A-2001-272503, International Publication No. 2012/018807, International Publication No. 2012/098967, International Publication No. 2012 No. 086,659, it is possible to use a material used to make the hard coat layer described in WO 2011/105594.
 また、上記色変化層Aは、重合性化合物を硬化してなる層であってもよく、重合性化合物及び重合開始剤を含む層であってもよいが、保存性、及び、上記色変化層Aと他の層との密着性の観点から、重合性化合物を硬化してなる層であることが好ましく、ウレタン結合、及び、炭素数2又は3のアルキレンオキシ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の部分構造を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物を少なくとも硬化してなる層であることがより好ましい。 The color change layer A may be a layer obtained by curing a polymerizable compound, or may be a layer containing a polymerizable compound and a polymerization initiator. From the viewpoint of adhesion between A and another layer, it is preferably a layer formed by curing a polymerizable compound, and at least one selected from the group consisting of a urethane bond and an alkyleneoxy group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. It is more preferable that the layer is formed by curing at least a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a partial structure.
 また、上記色変化層Aは、耐傷性、及び、屈折率を高める観点から、フィラーを含むことが好ましく、無機フィラーを含むことがより好ましく、屈折率1.55以上の高屈折率粒子を含むことが特に好ましい。
 更に、上記色変化層Aは、耐傷性、及び、屈折率を高める観点から、金属酸化物を含むことが好ましく、酸化ジルコニウム(ジルコニア)又は酸化チタン(チタニア)を含むことがより好ましい。
 また、上記フィラーの形状は、特に制限はないが、粒子状であることが好ましい。
In addition, the color change layer A preferably contains a filler, more preferably contains an inorganic filler, and contains high refractive index particles having a refractive index of 1.55 or more from the viewpoint of enhancing scratch resistance and a refractive index. Is particularly preferred.
Further, the color change layer A preferably contains a metal oxide, and more preferably contains zirconium oxide (zirconia) or titanium oxide (titania), from the viewpoint of increasing the scratch resistance and the refractive index.
The shape of the filler is not particularly limited, but is preferably particulate.
 上記屈折率1.55以上の高屈折率粒子(以下、「高屈折率粒子」ともいう。)は、凝集抑制性、及び、層の透明性の観点から、体積平均粒径が2nm以上100nm以下の無機粒子であることが好ましく、体積平均粒径が5nm以上80nm以下の無機粒子であることがより好ましく、体積平均粒径が10nm以上60nm以下の無機粒子であることが特に好ましい。
 上記フィラーは、1種単独、又は、2種以上混合して用いることができる。
 なお、フィラー及び粒子の体積平均粒径は、コールターカウンターにより測定される。
The high-refractive-index particles having a refractive index of 1.55 or more (hereinafter, also referred to as “high-refractive-index particles”) have a volume average particle diameter of 2 nm or more and 100 nm or less from the viewpoints of aggregation suppression and layer transparency. Is preferable, and it is more preferable that the volume average particle diameter is 5 nm or more and 80 nm or less, and it is particularly preferable that the volume average particle diameter is 10 nm or more and 60 nm or less.
The fillers can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The volume average particle diameter of the filler and the particles is measured by a Coulter counter.
 高屈折率粒子としては、耐傷性、及び、屈折率を高める観点から、アルミニウム、ジルコニウム、チタン、亜鉛、ゲルマニウム、インジウム、スズ、アンチモン、及び、セリウムよりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1つの元素の酸化物粒子であることが好ましく、酸化ジルコニウム粒子、又は、酸化チタン粒子であることがより好ましい。また両者のうちでは、耐光性の観点からは、光触媒作用のない酸化ジルコニウム粒子が好ましいが、光触媒作用を抑制した酸化チタン粒子を用いることも好ましい。
 高屈折率粒子の屈折率は、屈折率を高める観点から、1.60~3.00であることが好ましく、1.80~2.90であることがより好ましく、1.90~2.80であることが特に好ましい。
As the high refractive index particles, from the viewpoint of enhancing scratch resistance and refractive index, oxidation of at least one element selected from the group consisting of aluminum, zirconium, titanium, zinc, germanium, indium, tin, antimony, and cerium. Particles, more preferably zirconium oxide particles or titanium oxide particles. Among them, zirconium oxide particles having no photocatalytic action are preferable from the viewpoint of light resistance, but it is also preferable to use titanium oxide particles having suppressed photocatalytic action.
The refractive index of the high refractive index particles is preferably from 1.60 to 3.00, more preferably from 1.80 to 2.90, and more preferably from 1.90 to 2.80, from the viewpoint of increasing the refractive index. Is particularly preferred.
 また、高屈折率粒子の分散には、下記の各種の分散剤も好ましく用いることができる。
 分散剤は、更に架橋又は重合性官能基を含有することが好ましい。架橋又は重合性官能基としては、ラジカル種による付加反応・重合反応が可能なエチレン性不飽和基(例えば(メタ)アクリロイル基、アリル基、スチリル基、ビニルオキシ基等)、カチオン重合性基(エポキシ基、オキサタニル基、ビニルオキシ基等)、重縮合反応性基(加水分解性シリル基等、N-メチロール基)等が挙げられ、好ましくはエチレン性不飽和基を有する官能基である。
For dispersing the high refractive index particles, the following various dispersants can also be preferably used.
It is preferable that the dispersant further contains a crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group. Examples of the crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group include an ethylenically unsaturated group capable of undergoing an addition reaction and a polymerization reaction by a radical species (for example, a (meth) acryloyl group, an allyl group, a styryl group, a vinyloxy group, etc.), a cationic polymerizable group (epoxy Group, oxatanyl group, vinyloxy group, etc.), polycondensation-reactive group (hydrolyzable silyl group, N-methylol group), and the like, and is preferably a functional group having an ethylenically unsaturated group.
 高屈折率粒子の分散、特にTiOを主成分とする無機粒子の分散にはアニオン性基を有する分散剤を用いることが好ましく、アニオン性基、及び架橋又は重合性官能基を有することがより好ましく、該架橋又は重合性官能基を側鎖に有する分散剤であることが特に好ましい。架橋又は重合性官能基の具体例としては、上述の官能基が挙げられる。 It is preferable to use a dispersant having an anionic group for dispersing the high refractive index particles, particularly for dispersing the inorganic particles containing TiO 2 as a main component, and more preferably to have an anionic group and a crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group. Particularly preferred is a dispersant having the crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group in a side chain. Specific examples of the crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group include the above-described functional groups.
 アニオン性基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホン酸基(スルホ基)、リン酸基(ホスホノ基)、スルホンアミド基等の酸性プロトンを有する基、又は、その塩が好ましく、カルボキシ基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基又はその塩がより好ましく、カルボキシ基、又は、リン酸基が特に好ましい。1分子当たりの分散剤に含有されるアニオン性基の数は、1分子中に複数種類が含有されていてもよいが、平均で2個以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは5個以上、特に好ましくは10個以上である。また、分散剤に含有されるアニオン性基は、1分子中に複数種類が含有されていてもよい。 As the anionic group, a group having an acidic proton such as a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group (sulfo group), a phosphoric acid group (phosphono group), a sulfonamide group, or a salt thereof is preferable, and a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group, A phosphate group or a salt thereof is more preferred, and a carboxy group or a phosphate group is particularly preferred. The number of anionic groups contained in the dispersant per molecule may be plural in one molecule, but is preferably 2 or more on average, more preferably 5 or more, Particularly preferably, the number is 10 or more. Further, a plurality of kinds of anionic groups may be contained in one molecule of the dispersant.
 側鎖にアニオン性基を有する分散剤において、アニオン性基含有モノマー単位の組成は、全モノマー単位のうちの10-4mol%~100mol%の範囲であることが好ましく、1mol%~50mol%であることがより好ましく、5mol%~20mol%であることが特に好ましい。 In the dispersant having an anionic group in the side chain, the composition of the anionic group-containing monomer unit is preferably in the range of 10 −4 mol% to 100 mol% of all monomer units, and more preferably 1 mol% to 50 mol%. More preferably, it is particularly preferably from 5 mol% to 20 mol%.
 1分子当たりの分散剤に含有される架橋又は重合性官能基の数は、平均で2個以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは5個以上、特に好ましくは10個以上である。また、分散剤に含有される架橋又は重合性官能基は、1分子中に複数種類が含有されていてもよい。 数 The number of crosslinkable or polymerizable functional groups contained in the dispersant per molecule is preferably 2 or more on average, more preferably 5 or more, and particularly preferably 10 or more. In addition, a plurality of types of crosslinkable or polymerizable functional groups contained in the dispersant may be contained in one molecule.
 好ましい分散剤において、側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を有するモノマー単位の例としては、ポリ-1,2-ブタジエン及びポリ-1,2-イソプレン構造あるいは、(メタ)アクリル酸のエステル又はアミドの繰返し単位であって、それに特定の残基(-COOR又は-CONHRのR基)が結合しているものが利用できる。上記特定の残基(R基)の例としては、-(CH-CR21=CR2223、-(CHO)n-CHCR21=CR2223、-(CHCHO)-CHCR21=CR2223、-(CH-NH-CO-O-CHCR21=CR2223、-(CH)n-O-CO-CR21=CR2223及び-(CHCHO)-X(R21~R23はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数が1~20のアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基又はアリールオキシ基を表し、R21とR22又はR23とは互いに結合して環を形成してもよく、nは1~10の整数を表し、Xはジシクロペンタジエニル残基を表す。)を挙げることができる。エステル残基のRの具体例には、-CHCH=CH(特開昭64-17047号公報記載のアリル(メタ)アクリレートのポリマーに相当)、-CHCHO-CHCH=CH、-CHCHOCOCH=CH、-CHCHOCOC(CH)=CH、-CHC(CH)=CH、-CHCH=CH-C、-CHCHOCOCH=CH-C、-CHCH-NHCOO-CHCH=CH及び-CHCHO-X(Xはジシクロペンタジエニル残基)が含まれる。アミド残基のRの具体例には、-CHCH=CH、-CHCH-Y(Yは1-シクロヘキセニル残基)及び-CHCH-OCO-CH=CH、-CHCH-OCO-C(CH)=CHが含まれる。 In a preferred dispersant, examples of the monomer unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain include a poly-1,2-butadiene and poly-1,2-isoprene structure or an ester or amide of (meth) acrylic acid. A repeating unit having a specific residue (R group of —COOR or —CONHR) bonded thereto can be used. Examples of the specific residue (R group) include-(CH 2 ) n -CR 21 = CR 22 R 23 ,-(CH 2 O) n-CH 2 CR 21 = CR 22 R 23 ,-(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -CH 2 CR 21 = CR 22 R 23 ,-(CH 2 ) n -NH-CO-O-CH 2 CR 21 = CR 22 R 23 ,-(CH 2 ) n-O-CO —CR 21 CRCR 22 R 23 and — (CH 2 CH 2 O) 2 —X (R 21 to R 23 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group, Represents an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group, R 21 and R 22 or R 23 may be bonded to each other to form a ring, n represents an integer of 1 to 10, and X represents a dicyclopentadienyl residue Represents.). Specific examples of R in the ester residue include —CH 2 CH = CH 2 (corresponding to a polymer of allyl (meth) acrylate described in JP-A-64-17047), —CH 2 CH 2 O—CH 2 CH = CH 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 OCOCH = CH 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 OCOC (CH 3 ) = CH 2 , -CH 2 C (CH 3 ) = CH 2 , -CH 2 CH = CH-C 6 H 5, -CH 2 CH 2 OCOCH = CH-C 6 H 5, -CH 2 CH 2 -NHCOO-CH 2 CH = CH 2 and -CH 2 CH 2 O-X ( X is a dicyclopentadienyl residue) Is included. Specific examples of R of the amide residue include —CH 2 CH = CH 2 , —CH 2 CH 2 —Y (Y is a 1-cyclohexenyl residue), and —CH 2 CH 2 —OCO—CH = CH 2 , —CH 2 CH 2 —OCO—C (CH 3 ) = CH 2 is included.
 上記のエチレン性不飽和基を有する分散剤においては、その不飽和結合基にフリーラジカル(重合開始ラジカル又は重合性化合物の重合過程の生長ラジカル)が付加し、分子間で直接、又は重合性化合物の重合連鎖を介して付加重合して、分子間に架橋が形成されて硬化する。あるいは、分子中の原子(例えば不飽和結合基に隣接する炭素原子上の水素原子)がフリーラジカルにより引き抜かれてポリマーラジカルが生成し、それが互いに結合することによって、分子間に架橋が形成されて硬化する。 In the dispersant having an ethylenically unsaturated group, a free radical (a polymerization initiation radical or a growing radical in the course of polymerization of the polymerizable compound) is added to the unsaturated bond group, and directly between the molecules or the polymerizable compound. Is subjected to addition polymerization through a polymerization chain of the above, and a crosslink is formed between the molecules to be cured. Alternatively, atoms in the molecule (eg, a hydrogen atom on a carbon atom adjacent to the unsaturated bonding group) are abstracted by free radicals to form polymer radicals, which are linked together to form crosslinks between the molecules. To cure.
 アニオン性基、及び架橋又は重合性官能基を有し、かつ該架橋又は重合性官能基を側鎖に有する分散剤の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、特に限定されないが、1,000以上であることが好ましく、2,000~1,000,000であることがより好ましく、5,000~200,000であることが更に好ましく、10,000~100,000であることが特に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dispersant having an anionic group and a crosslinked or polymerizable functional group and having the crosslinked or polymerizable functional group in a side chain is not particularly limited, but is 1,000 or more. It is preferably 2,000 to 1,000,000, more preferably 5,000 to 200,000, and particularly preferably 10,000 to 100,000.
 架橋又は重合性官能基の含有単位は、アニオン性基含有モノマー単位以外の全てのモノマー単位を構成していてもよいが、好ましくは全モノマー単位のうちの5mol%~50mol%であり、特に好ましくは5mol%~30mol%である。 The content unit of the crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group may constitute all the monomer units other than the anionic group-containing monomer unit, but is preferably 5 mol% to 50 mol% of all the monomer units, and particularly preferably. Is 5 mol% to 30 mol%.
 分散剤は、架橋又は重合性官能基、アニオン性基を有するモノマー以外の適当なモノマーとの共重合体であってもよい。共重合成分に関しては特に限定はされないが、分散安定性、他のモノマー成分との相溶性、形成皮膜の強度等種々の観点から選択される。好ましい例としては、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、t‐ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロへキシル(メタ)アクリレート、スチレン等が挙げられる。 The dispersant may be a copolymer with a suitable monomer other than a monomer having a crosslinkable or polymerizable functional group or an anionic group. The copolymerization component is not particularly limited, but is selected from various viewpoints such as dispersion stability, compatibility with other monomer components, and strength of a formed film. Preferred examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, t-butyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, and styrene.
 分散剤の形態は、特に制限はないが、ブロック共重合体又はランダム共重合体であることが好ましく、コスト及び合成的な容易さの観点から、ランダム共重合体であることが特に好ましい。 形態 The form of the dispersant is not particularly limited, but is preferably a block copolymer or a random copolymer, and particularly preferably a random copolymer from the viewpoint of cost and ease of synthesis.
 上記色変化層Aにおける分散剤の含有量は、高屈折率粒子の全質量に対し、1質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、5質量%~30質量%であることがより好ましく、5質量%~20質量%であることが特に好ましい。また、分散剤は2種類以上を併用してもよい。好ましく用いられる分散剤に関しては、特開2007-293313号公報に詳細な記載がある。 The content of the dispersant in the color change layer A is preferably from 1% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably from 5% by mass to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the high refractive index particles, It is particularly preferred that the content is 5% by mass to 20% by mass. Further, two or more dispersants may be used in combination. JP-A-2007-293313 has a detailed description of a dispersant that is preferably used.
 高屈折率粒子の分散媒体への分散方法は、特に制限はないが、分散機を用いて分散することができる。分散機の例としては、サンドグラインダーミル(例、ピン付きビーズミル)、高速インペラーミル、ペッブルミル、ローラーミル、アトライター及びコロイドミル等が挙げられる。中でも、サンドグラインダーミル又は高速インペラーミルが特に好ましい。また、予備分散処理を実施してもよい。予備分散処理に用いる分散機の例には、ボールミル、三本ロールミル、ニーダーおよびエクストルーダーが含まれる。
 高屈折率粒子は、分散媒体中でなるべく微細化されていることが好ましく、好ましい体積平均粒径は上述の粒径に順ずるものである。
The method of dispersing the high refractive index particles in the dispersion medium is not particularly limited, but can be dispersed using a disperser. Examples of the dispersing machine include a sand grinder mill (eg, a bead mill with pins), a high-speed impeller mill, a pebble mill, a roller mill, an attritor, a colloid mill, and the like. Among them, a sand grinder mill or a high-speed impeller mill is particularly preferable. Further, a preliminary dispersion process may be performed. Examples of the disperser used for the preliminary dispersion treatment include a ball mill, a three-roll mill, a kneader, and an extruder.
The high refractive index particles are preferably miniaturized as much as possible in the dispersion medium, and the preferred volume average particle size is in accordance with the above-mentioned particle size.
 上記色変化層Aにおけるフィラーの含有量は、所望の強度及び屈折率に応じ適宜調整することができるが、色変化性、耐傷性、及び、屈折率を高める観点から、上記色変化層Aの全質量に対し、10質量%~95質量%であることが好ましく、15質量%~90質量%であることがより好ましく、20質量%~85質量%であることが更に好ましく、30質量%~80質量%であることが特に好ましい。 The content of the filler in the color change layer A can be appropriately adjusted according to the desired strength and refractive index. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the color change property, scratch resistance, and the refractive index, the color change layer A It is preferably from 10% by mass to 95% by mass, more preferably from 15% by mass to 90% by mass, still more preferably from 20% by mass to 85% by mass, and more preferably from 30% by mass to 85% by mass with respect to the total mass. Particularly preferred is 80% by mass.
〔色変化層B〕
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、色変化層Bを有し、上記色変化層Bが、上記色変化層Aよりも屈折率が0.1以上低い層である。
 上記色変化層Bは、色変化性、及び、黒しまり性の観点から、反射防止能を有する層であることが好ましい。
 また、上記色変化層Bは、耐傷性の観点からは、上記色変化層Aよりも厚い層であることが好ましい。
[Color changing layer B]
The decorative film according to the present disclosure has a color changing layer B, and the color changing layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color changing layer A by 0.1 or more.
The color change layer B is preferably a layer having antireflection ability from the viewpoint of color change and blackness.
The color change layer B is preferably a thicker layer than the color change layer A from the viewpoint of scratch resistance.
 上記色変化層Bの材質としては、特に制限はないが、以下に示す成分を含むことが好ましい。
 上記色変化層Bは、耐傷性の観点から、バインダーとして、樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましく、樹脂を含むことがより好ましく、樹脂及び重合性化合物を含むことが更に好ましい。
 樹脂としては、耐傷性の観点から、熱硬化性樹脂、及び、光硬化性樹脂よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
 熱硬化性樹脂、及び、光硬化性樹脂としては、上記色変化層Aにて上述したものを、屈折率を適宜選択し、好適に用いることができる。
 重合性化合物としては、特に制限はなく、公知のモノマー、オリゴマー等を用いることができる。また、重合性化合物としては、上述した着色層における重合性化合物を好適に用いることができる。
 また、重合性化合物としては、上記色変化層Aにて上述したものを、硬化前又は硬化後における屈折率を適宜選択し、好適に用いることができる。
 上記色変化層Bは、重合性化合物を含む場合、硬化性、及び、耐傷性の観点から、重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。
 重合開始剤としては、上記着色層において上述したものを好適に用いることができる。   
The material of the color change layer B is not particularly limited, but preferably contains the following components.
From the viewpoint of scratch resistance, the color change layer B preferably contains, as a binder, at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, more preferably contains a resin, and more preferably contains a resin. It is more preferable to include an acidic compound.
From the viewpoint of scratch resistance, the resin preferably contains at least one resin selected from the group consisting of a thermosetting resin and a photocurable resin.
As the thermosetting resin and the photocurable resin, those described above for the color change layer A can be suitably used by appropriately selecting the refractive index.
There is no particular limitation on the polymerizable compound, and known monomers and oligomers can be used. Further, as the polymerizable compound, the above-described polymerizable compound in the colored layer can be suitably used.
In addition, as the polymerizable compound, those described above in the color change layer A can be suitably used by appropriately selecting the refractive index before or after curing.
When the color change layer B contains a polymerizable compound, it is preferable to contain a polymerization initiator from the viewpoint of curability and scratch resistance.
As the polymerization initiator, those described above in the colored layer can be suitably used.
 上記色変化層Bは、上記色変化層Aよりも屈折率が0.1以上低い層であるため、屈折率の低い材料を含むことが好ましい。
 上記色変化層Bは、色変化性の点から屈折率が1.5以下であることが好ましく、1.4以下であることがより好ましい。屈折率を1.5以下とする点で、上記色変化層Bは、空隙を有するシロキサン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、低屈折率粒子よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1つを含むことが好ましく、空隙を有するシロキサン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、及び、中空シリカ粒子よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1つを含むことが含むことがより好ましい。
 フッ素樹脂としては、特に制限ないが、特開2009-217258号公報の段落0076~0106や、特開2007-229999号公報の段落0083~0127に記載のもの等が挙げられる。
 フッ素樹脂の例としては、オレフィン中の水素をフッ素に置換したフッ化アルキル樹脂が挙げられ、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、ポリクロロトリフルオロエチレン、ポリフッ化ビニリデン、ポリフッ化ビニルやパーフルオロアルコキシアルカン、パーフルオロエチレンプロペン、エチレンテトラフルオロエチレンなどの共重合体、又は、乳化剤や水との親和性を高める成分と共重合体化して水分散化したフッ素樹脂ディスパージョンなどがある。このようなフッ素樹脂の具体例としては、旭硝子(株)製ルミフロン、オブリガート、ダイキン工業(株)製ゼッフル、ネオフロン、デュポン社製テフロン、アルケマ社カイナーなどが挙げられる。
 また、重合性官能基及び架橋性官能基のうちの少なくとも1つの基を有し、かつフッ素原子を含む化合物を用いてもよく、パーフルオロアルキル(メタ)アクリレート、フッ化ビニルモノマー、フッ化ビニリデンモノマーのようなラジカル重合性のモノマーや、パーフルオロオキセタンのようなカチオン重合性のモノマーなどが挙げられる。このようなフッ素化合物の具体例としては、共栄社化学(株)製LINC3A、ダイキン工業(株)製オプツール、荒川化学工業(株)製オプスター、ダイキン工業(株)製などテトラフルオロオキセタン等が挙げられる。
 低屈折率粒子、好ましくは屈折率1.45以下の粒子としては、特に制限はないが、特開2009-217258号公報の段落0075~0103に記載のものが挙げられる。
 低屈折率粒子の例としては、シリカなどの無機酸化物粒子やアクリルなどの樹脂粒子を用いた中空粒子、粒子表面に多孔質構造を有する多孔質粒子、素材自体の屈折率が低いフッ化物粒子などが挙げられる。
 このような中空粒子の具体例としては、日揮触媒化成(株)製スルーリア、日鉄鉱業(株)製シリナックス等の中空シリカ粒子、積水化成品工業(株)製テクポリマーMBX、SBX等の多中空樹脂粒子等が挙げられる。多孔質粒子の具体例としては、日産化学工業(株)製ライトスター等が、フッ化物粒子の具体例としては、(株)希少金属材料研究所製フッ化マグネシウムナノ粒子等が挙げられる。
Since the color change layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.1 or more, it is preferable to include a material having a low refractive index.
The color change layer B preferably has a refractive index of 1.5 or less, more preferably 1.4 or less, from the viewpoint of color change. In that the refractive index is 1.5 or less, the color change layer B preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a siloxane resin having a void, a fluororesin, and low refractive index particles. More preferably, it contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a siloxane resin, a fluororesin, and hollow silica particles.
The fluororesin is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include those described in paragraphs 0076 to 0106 of JP-A-2009-217258 and paragraphs 0083 to 0127 of JP-A-2007-229999.
Examples of the fluorine resin include an alkyl fluoride resin in which hydrogen in an olefin is replaced with fluorine, and include polytetrafluoroethylene, polychlorotrifluoroethylene, polyvinylidene fluoride, polyvinyl fluoride, perfluoroalkoxyalkane, and perfluoroalkyl resin. Examples include a copolymer such as ethylene propene and ethylene tetrafluoroethylene, or a fluororesin dispersion which is copolymerized with an emulsifier or a component for enhancing affinity with water and dispersed in water. Specific examples of such a fluororesin include Lumiflon and Obrigato manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd., Zeffle and Neoflon manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd., Teflon manufactured by DuPont, and Kynar Kayner.
Further, a compound having at least one of a polymerizable functional group and a crosslinkable functional group and containing a fluorine atom may be used, and a perfluoroalkyl (meth) acrylate, a vinyl fluoride monomer, a vinylidene fluoride, Examples include radically polymerizable monomers such as monomers, and cationically polymerizable monomers such as perfluorooxetane. Specific examples of such a fluorine compound include LINC3A manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., Optool manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd., Opstar manufactured by Arakawa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., and tetrafluorooxetane manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd. .
The low refractive index particles, preferably particles having a refractive index of 1.45 or less are not particularly limited, and examples thereof include those described in paragraphs 0075 to 0103 of JP-A-2009-217258.
Examples of low refractive index particles include hollow particles using inorganic oxide particles such as silica and resin particles such as acrylic, porous particles having a porous structure on the particle surface, and fluoride particles having a low refractive index of the material itself. And the like.
Specific examples of such hollow particles include hollow silica particles such as Sluria manufactured by JGC Catalysts & Chemicals Co., Ltd., Sirinax manufactured by Nittetsu Mining Co., Ltd., Techpolymer MBX and SBX manufactured by Sekisui Plastics Co., Ltd. Examples include multi-hollow resin particles. Specific examples of the porous particles include Light Star manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., and specific examples of the fluoride particles include magnesium fluoride nanoparticles manufactured by Rare Metal Materials Laboratory Co., Ltd.
 上記空隙を有するシロキサン樹脂としては、樹脂基材の熱変形等の劣化を抑制する点、及び、色変化層B表面に既述のような開口部が形成され難い点から、中空粒子又はコアシェル粒子を用いて、シロキサン樹脂を含んで構成されるマトリックス中に閉鎖空隙を形成する方法を用いることが好ましい。中空粒子を含む組成物を塗布して色変化層Bを形成する方法としては、例えば、特開2009-103808号公報の段落0028~0029に記載の方法、又は特開2008-262187号公報の段落0030~0031に記載の方法を適用できる。特に、空隙径及び空隙率の調整が容易である点から、コアシェル粒子を用いて色変化層Bを形成する方法が好ましい。 As the siloxane resin having the voids, hollow particles or core-shell particles are used in terms of suppressing deterioration such as thermal deformation of the resin base material and in that the above-described openings are not easily formed on the surface of the color change layer B. It is preferable to use a method of forming closed voids in a matrix containing a siloxane resin using Examples of a method for forming the color-changing layer B by applying a composition containing hollow particles include, for example, the methods described in paragraphs 0028 to 0029 of JP-A-2009-103808 or the paragraphs of JP-A-2008-262187. The methods described in 0030 to 0031 can be applied. In particular, a method of forming the color change layer B using core-shell particles is preferable because the adjustment of the void diameter and the void ratio is easy.
 以下に、コアシェル粒子を用いた色変化層Bの形成方法について好ましい一態様を説明するが、本開示における色変化層Bは、この形成方法にて形成されたものに限定されない。
 コアシェル粒子を用いた色変化層Bの形成方法には、コアシェル粒子及びシロキサン化合物を含む塗布液(以下、「色変化層B形成塗布液」ともいう。)が用いられることが好ましい。
Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a method for forming the color-change layer B using the core-shell particles will be described, but the color-change layer B in the present disclosure is not limited to the one formed by this method.
In the method of forming the color-change layer B using the core-shell particles, it is preferable to use a coating solution containing the core-shell particles and a siloxane compound (hereinafter, also referred to as a “color-change layer B-forming coating solution”).
-コアシェル粒子-
 色変化層B形成塗布液は、コアシェル粒子を含むことが好ましい。
 コアシェル粒子としては、閉鎖空隙の形成し易さの点から、有機溶剤をコア材として含むことが好ましく、特に、有機溶剤の20質量%以上が、沸点90℃以上350℃以下の非極性溶剤であることが好ましい。
 なお、本開示における「沸点」は、1気圧(101,325Pa)における沸点である。また、本開示における「非極性溶剤」とは、水への溶解度が20℃において0.1質量%以下であり、比誘電率の値が10以下である溶剤をいう。
-Core-shell particles-
The color change layer B forming coating liquid preferably contains core-shell particles.
The core-shell particles preferably contain an organic solvent as a core material from the viewpoint of easy formation of closed voids. In particular, 20% by mass or more of the organic solvent is a nonpolar solvent having a boiling point of 90 ° C or more and 350 ° C or less. Preferably, there is.
The “boiling point” in the present disclosure is a boiling point at 1 atm (101,325 Pa). The “non-polar solvent” in the present disclosure refers to a solvent having a solubility in water of 0.1% by mass or less at 20 ° C. and a relative dielectric constant of 10 or less.
 沸点90℃以上350℃以下の非極性溶剤としては、炭化水素化合物、フッ化炭化水素化合物、及び、シリコーン化合物等が挙げられるが、色変化層Bの光透過性及びヘーズの観点から、炭化水素化合物であることが好ましい。 Examples of the nonpolar solvent having a boiling point of 90 ° C. or more and 350 ° C. or less include a hydrocarbon compound, a fluorinated hydrocarbon compound, and a silicone compound. From the viewpoint of the light transmittance and haze of the color change layer B, hydrocarbon It is preferably a compound.
 コアシェル粒子のシェルの材質は、特に制限はないが、色変化層Bの強度、光透過性及びヘーズの観点から、ポリシロキサン化合物を含むことが好ましく、後述する式1で表されるシロキサン化合物の加水分解縮合物を含むことがより好ましく、後述する式1で表されるシロキサン化合物の加水分解縮合物を、シェルの全質量に対し、50質量%以上含むことが更に好ましく、後述する式1で表されるシロキサン化合物の加水分解縮合物からなることが特に好ましい。 The material of the shell of the core-shell particles is not particularly limited, but preferably contains a polysiloxane compound from the viewpoints of strength, light transmittance, and haze of the color change layer B. More preferably, the composition contains a hydrolysis condensate, more preferably 50% by mass or more based on the total mass of the shell, of the siloxane compound represented by Formula 1 described below, and more preferably 50% by mass or more. It is particularly preferred to be composed of a hydrolyzed condensate of the represented siloxane compound.
 コアシェル粒子の体積平均粒子径は、色変化層Bの強度、光透過性及びヘーズの観点から、0.05μm~1.5μmであることが好ましく、0.08μm~1.0μmであることがより好ましく、0.1μm~0.6μmであることが更に好ましく、0.1μm~0.4μmであることが特に好ましい。 The volume average particle diameter of the core-shell particles is preferably from 0.05 μm to 1.5 μm, more preferably from 0.08 μm to 1.0 μm, from the viewpoint of the strength, light transmittance and haze of the color change layer B. More preferably, it is 0.1 μm to 0.6 μm, particularly preferably 0.1 μm to 0.4 μm.
 本開示における粒子の体積平均粒子径は、レーザー回折・散乱式粒子径分布測定装置(型番:マイクロトラックMT3300EXII、マイクロトラックベル(株)製)を用いて測定するものとする。なお、本開示において平均粒子径は、メジアン径を意味する。
 また、本開示におけるコアシェル粒子の粒子径の変動係数は、上記測定において測定した粒子径の体積分布における標準偏差を、メジアン径で除算することにより算出する。
The volume average particle size of the particles in the present disclosure is measured using a laser diffraction / scattering type particle size distribution measuring device (model number: Microtrac MT3300EXII, manufactured by Microtrac Bell Co., Ltd.). In the present disclosure, the average particle diameter means a median diameter.
In addition, the coefficient of variation of the particle diameter of the core-shell particles in the present disclosure is calculated by dividing the standard deviation in the volume distribution of the particle diameter measured in the above measurement by the median diameter.
 コアシェル粒子におけるコアの大きさ(最大径)は、色変化層Bの強度、光透過性及びヘーズの観点から、40nm以上であることが好ましく、40nm~1,000nmであることがより好ましく、60nm~600nmであることが特に好ましい。
 コアシェル粒子におけるコアの大きさ(最大径)は、既述の色変化層Bの空隙の径の測定方法と同様の方法により測定することができる。
The size (maximum diameter) of the core in the core-shell particles is preferably 40 nm or more, more preferably 40 nm to 1,000 nm, and more preferably 60 nm, from the viewpoints of the strength, light transmittance and haze of the color change layer B. It is particularly preferred that the thickness be up to 600 nm.
The size (maximum diameter) of the core in the core-shell particles can be measured by the same method as the method for measuring the diameter of the void in the color change layer B described above.
-シロキサン化合物-
 色変化層B形成用塗布液は、シロキサン化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 特に、シロキサン化合物としては、下記式1で表されるシロキサン化合物、及び、下記式1で表されるシロキサン化合物の加水分解縮合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物(以下、特定シロキサン化合物ともいう。)が好ましい。
-Siloxane compound-
The coating liquid for forming the color change layer B preferably contains a siloxane compound.
In particular, as the siloxane compound, at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a siloxane compound represented by the following formula 1 and a hydrolyzed condensate of the siloxane compound represented by the following formula 1 (hereinafter referred to as a specific siloxane compound) Is also referred to as a compound).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 式1中、R、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~6のアルキル基、又は、アルケニル基を表し、Rは複数の場合はそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基、ビニル基、又は、ビニル基、エポキシ基、ビニルフェニル基、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、アミノ基、イソシアヌレート基、ウレイド基、メルカプト基、スルフィド基、ポリオキシアルキル基、カルボキシ基及び第四級アンモニウム基よりなる群から選ばれる基を有するアルキル基を表し、mは、0~2の整数を表し、nは1~20の整数を表す。 In Formula 1, R 1 , R 2, and R 3 each independently represent an alkyl group or an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and when a plurality of R 4 s are present, an alkyl group, a vinyl group, Or vinyl, epoxy, vinylphenyl, (meth) acryloxy, (meth) acrylamide, amino, isocyanurate, ureido, mercapto, sulfide, polyoxyalkyl, carboxy and quaternary Represents an alkyl group having a group selected from the group consisting of quaternary ammonium groups, m represents an integer of 0 to 2, and n represents an integer of 1 to 20.
 式1で表されるシロキサン化合物の加水分解縮合物とは、式1で表されるシロキサン化合物と、式1で表されるシロキサン化合物におけるケイ素原子上の置換基の少なくとも一部が加水分解して、シラノール基となっている化合物とが縮合した化合物をいう。 The hydrolysis-condensation product of the siloxane compound represented by the formula 1 means that the siloxane compound represented by the formula 1 and at least a part of the substituents on the silicon atoms in the siloxane compound represented by the formula 1 are hydrolyzed. , A compound obtained by condensation with a compound having a silanol group.
 式1におけるR、R及びRにおける炭素数1~6のアルキル基、又は、アルケニル基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐を有していても、環構造を有していてもよい。炭素数1~6のアルキル基、またはアルケニル基としては、保護層の強度、光透過性及びヘーズの観点から、アルキル基であることが好ましい。
 炭素数1~6のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、n-ペンチル基、n-ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基等が挙げられ、メチル基又はエチル基であることが好ましく、メチル基であることがより好ましい。
 
 式1におけるRは、保護層の強度、光透過性及びヘーズの観点から、複数の場合はそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~8のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 また、式1におけるRの炭素数は、1~40であることが好ましく、1~20であることがより好ましく、1~8であることが特に好ましい。
 式1におけるmは、保護層の強度、光透過性及びヘーズの観点から、1又は2であることが好ましく、2であることがより好ましい。
 式1におけるnは、保護層の強度、光透過性及びヘーズの観点から、2~20の整数であることが好ましい。
The alkyl group or alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms in R 1 , R 2 and R 3 in the formula 1 may have a ring structure, whether it is linear or branched. Is also good. The alkyl group or alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group from the viewpoint of the strength, light transmittance and haze of the protective layer.
Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an n-pentyl group, an n-hexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group. And preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.

In the formula 1, R 4 is preferably an alkyl group independently from the viewpoint of the strength, light transmittance, and haze of the protective layer, and is more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. preferable.
Further, the carbon number of R 4 in Formula 1 is preferably 1 to 40, more preferably 1 to 20, and particularly preferably 1 to 8.
M in the formula 1 is preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 2 from the viewpoint of the strength, light transmittance and haze of the protective layer.
N in Formula 1 is preferably an integer of 2 to 20 from the viewpoints of strength, light transmittance, and haze of the protective layer.
 特定シロキサン化合物の例としては、信越化学工業(株)製のKBE-04、KBE-13、KBE-22、KBE-1003、KBM-303、KBE-403、KBM-1403、KBE-503、KBM-5103、KBE-903、KBE-9103P、KBE-585、KBE-803、KBE-846、KR-500、KR-515、KR-516、KR-517、KR-518、X-12-1135、X-12-1126、X-12-1131;エボニックジャパン(株)製のDynasylan4150;三菱ケミカル(株)製のMKCシリケートMS51、MS56、MS57、MS56S;コルコート(株)製のエチルシリケート28、N-プロピルシリケート、N-ブチルシリケート、SS-101;等が挙げられる。 Examples of the specific siloxane compound include KBE-04, KBE-13, KBE-22, KBE-1003, KBM-303, KBE-403, KBM-1403, KBE-503, KBM- manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. 5103, KBE-903, KBE-9103P, KBE-585, KBE-803, KBE-846, KR-500, KR-515, KR-516, KR-517, KR-518, X-12-1135, X- 12-1126, X-12-1131; Dynasylan 4150 manufactured by Evonik Japan Co., Ltd .; MKC silicate MS51, MS56, MS57, MS56S manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation; ethyl silicate 28, N-propyl silicate manufactured by Colcoat Co., Ltd. , N-butyl silicate, SS-101; .
-界面活性剤-
 色変化層B形成用塗布液は、界面活性剤を含むことが好ましい。
 界面活性剤としては、ノニオン界面活性剤、イオン性界面活性剤であるアニオン界面活性剤、カチオン界面活性剤、両性界面活性剤等が挙げられ、いずれも本開示に好適に用いることができる。
 中でも、上述の特定シロキサン化合物と相互作用的な引力によりコアシェル粒子が効率的に形成される点、保存安定性、並びに、色変化層Bの光透過性及びヘーズの観点から、ノニオン界面活性剤、及び、カチオン界面活性剤よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の界面活性剤が好ましく、カチオン界面活性剤がより好ましい。
-Surfactant-
The coating liquid for forming the color change layer B preferably contains a surfactant.
Examples of the surfactant include a nonionic surfactant, an anionic surfactant that is an ionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an amphoteric surfactant, and the like, and any of them can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
Among them, the point that core-shell particles are efficiently formed by the above-mentioned specific siloxane compound and interactive attractive force, storage stability, and, from the viewpoint of light transmittance and haze of the color-change layer B, a nonionic surfactant, And, at least one surfactant selected from the group consisting of cationic surfactants is preferred, and cationic surfactants are more preferred.
-その他の成分-
 色変化層B形成用塗布液は、既述の成分に加え、目的に応じて他の成分を含有することができる。
 他の成分としては、公知の添加剤を用いることができ、例えば、帯電防止剤、シロキサン化合物の縮合触媒、防腐剤等が挙げられる。
-Other components-
The coating solution for forming the color-change layer B may contain other components in addition to the components described above, depending on the purpose.
As other components, known additives can be used, and examples thereof include an antistatic agent, a siloxane compound condensation catalyst, and a preservative.
・帯電防止剤
 色変化層B形成用塗布液は、帯電防止剤を含有してもよい。
 帯電防止剤は、色変化層Bに帯電防止性を付与することで、汚染物質の付着を抑制する目的で用いられる。
 帯電防止性を付与するための帯電防止剤としては、特に制限はない。
 本開示に用いられる帯電防止剤としては、金属酸化物粒子、金属ナノ粒子、導電性高分子、及び、イオン液体よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を好ましく用いることができる。帯電防止剤は2種以上を併用してもよい。
 金属酸化物粒子は帯電防止性を与えるために比較的多量の添加が必要であるが、無機粒子であるために、金属酸化物粒子を含有することで、色変化層Bの防汚性をより高めることができる。
-Antistatic agent The coating liquid for forming the color change layer B may contain an antistatic agent.
The antistatic agent is used for imparting antistatic properties to the color change layer B, thereby suppressing the attachment of contaminants.
The antistatic agent for imparting antistatic properties is not particularly limited.
As the antistatic agent used in the present disclosure, at least one selected from the group consisting of metal oxide particles, metal nanoparticles, conductive polymers, and ionic liquids can be preferably used. Two or more antistatic agents may be used in combination.
The metal oxide particles need to be added in a relatively large amount in order to provide antistatic properties. Can be enhanced.
 金属酸化物粒子には、特に制限はないが、酸化スズ粒子、アンチモンドープ酸化スズ粒子、スズドープ酸化インジウム粒子、酸化亜鉛粒子、シリカ粒子等が挙げられる。
 金属酸化物粒子は屈折率が大きく、粒子径が大きいと透過光の散乱による光透過性の低下が懸念されるため、金属酸化物粒子の平均一次粒子径は100nm以下であることが好ましく、50nm以下であることがより好ましく、30nm以下であることが特に好ましい。また、下限値は、2nm以上であることが好ましい。
 また粒子の形状は特に限定されず、球状であっても、板状であっても、針状であってもよい。
 金属酸化物粒子の平均一次粒子径は、分散した粒子を透過型電子顕微鏡により観察し、得られた写真から求めることができる。写真の画像より、粒子の投影面積を求め、そこから円相当径を求め平均粒子径(平均一次粒子径)とする。本明細書における平均一次粒子径は、300個以上の粒子について投影面積を測定して、円相当径を求めて算出した値を用いている。
 なお、金属酸化物粒子の形状が球状ではない場合にはその他の方法、例えば動的光散乱法を用いて求めてもよい。
The metal oxide particles are not particularly limited, and examples thereof include tin oxide particles, antimony-doped tin oxide particles, tin-doped indium oxide particles, zinc oxide particles, and silica particles.
The metal oxide particles have a large refractive index, and if the particle size is large, there is a concern that light transmittance may be reduced due to scattering of transmitted light, so the average primary particle size of the metal oxide particles is preferably 100 nm or less, It is more preferably at most 30 nm, particularly preferably at most 30 nm. Further, the lower limit is preferably 2 nm or more.
The shape of the particles is not particularly limited, and may be spherical, plate-like, or needle-like.
The average primary particle diameter of the metal oxide particles can be determined from a photograph obtained by observing the dispersed particles with a transmission electron microscope. From the image of the photograph, the projected area of the particles is determined, and the equivalent circle diameter is determined therefrom, which is defined as the average particle diameter (average primary particle diameter). The average primary particle diameter in the present specification uses a value obtained by measuring the projected area of 300 or more particles and calculating the equivalent circle diameter.
When the shape of the metal oxide particles is not spherical, it may be determined by using another method, for example, a dynamic light scattering method.
 帯電防止剤は、色変化層B形成用塗布液に1種のみ含有してもよく、2種以上含有してもよい。金属酸化物粒子を2種以上含有する場合、平均一次粒子径、形状、素材が互いに異なるものを2種以上使用してもよい。
 色変化層B形成用塗布液においては、帯電防止剤の含有量は色変化層B形成用塗布液の全固形分に対し、40質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。
 帯電防止剤の含有量を上記範囲とすることにより、色変化層B形成用塗布液の製膜性を低下させることなく、色変化層Bに効果的に帯電防止性を付与することができる。
 また、帯電防止剤として金属酸化物粒子を用いる場合の含有量は、色変化層B形成用塗布液の全質量に対し、30質量%以下であることが好ましく、20質量%以下であることがより好ましく、10質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。
 金属酸化物粒子の含有量を上記範囲とすることで、色変化層B形成用塗布液における金属酸化物粒子の分散性が良好となり、凝集の発生が抑制され、必要な帯電防止性を色変化層Bに付与することができる。
The antistatic agent may be contained alone or in combination of two or more in the coating solution for forming the color change layer B. When two or more types of metal oxide particles are contained, two or more types having different average primary particle diameters, shapes, and materials may be used.
In the coating solution for forming the color changing layer B, the content of the antistatic agent is preferably 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the coating solution for forming the color changing layer B. Is more preferable, and particularly preferably 20% by mass or less.
By setting the content of the antistatic agent in the above range, the antistatic property can be effectively imparted to the color changing layer B without lowering the film forming property of the coating solution for forming the color changing layer B.
When metal oxide particles are used as the antistatic agent, the content is preferably 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 20% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the coating solution for forming the color change layer B. More preferably, it is particularly preferably 10% by mass or less.
By setting the content of the metal oxide particles in the above range, the dispersibility of the metal oxide particles in the coating solution for forming the color change layer B becomes good, the occurrence of aggregation is suppressed, and the necessary antistatic property is changed by the color change. It can be applied to layer B.
・縮合触媒
 色変化層B形成用塗布液は、シロキサン化合物の縮合を促進する縮合触媒を含有することが好ましい。
 色変化層B形成用塗布液が縮合触媒を含有することにより、より耐久性に優れた色変化層Bを形成することができる。
-Condensation catalyst The coating liquid for forming the color change layer B preferably contains a condensation catalyst that promotes the condensation of the siloxane compound.
When the coating solution for forming the color-change layer B contains a condensation catalyst, the color-change layer B having more excellent durability can be formed.
-色変化層B形成用塗布液の調製-
 色変化層B形成用塗布液の調製方法は、特に制限はなく、例えば、有機溶剤、界面活性剤、及び、水を混合して、有機溶剤を水中に分散し、特定シロキサン化合物を添加して一部加水分解縮合して分散した有機溶剤の表面にシェル層を形成してコアシェル粒子を作製し、色変化層B形成用塗布液を製造する方法、有機溶剤をコア材として含むコアシェル粒子、特定シロキサン化合物、界面活性剤、及び、水を混合して製造する方法等が挙げられる。
-Preparation of coating solution for forming color change layer B-
The method of preparing the coating solution for forming the color-change layer B is not particularly limited. For example, an organic solvent, a surfactant, and water are mixed, the organic solvent is dispersed in water, and a specific siloxane compound is added. A method for producing a core-shell particle by forming a shell layer on the surface of an organic solvent dispersed and partially hydrolyzed and condensed to produce a coating solution for forming a color-change layer B, a core-shell particle containing an organic solvent as a core material, A method of mixing and producing a siloxane compound, a surfactant, and water is exemplified.
-色変化層Bの形成-
 以上説明した色変化層B形成用塗布液は、色変化層Bの下層上に塗布し、乾燥させることで、色変化層Bが形成される。
 色変化層B形成用塗布液を塗布する方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば、スプレー塗布、刷毛塗布、ローラー塗布、バー塗布、ディップ塗布等の公知の塗布法をいずれも適用することができる。
 また、色変化層B形成用塗布液を塗布する前に、色変化層B形成用塗布液が塗布される下層に対し、コロナ放電処理、グロー処理、大気圧プラズマ処理、火炎処理、紫外線照射処理等の表面処理を施してもよい。
-Formation of color change layer B-
The coating liquid for forming the color-change layer B described above is applied on the lower layer of the color-change layer B and dried to form the color-change layer B.
The method for applying the coating solution for forming the color-change layer B is not particularly limited, and any of known coating methods such as spray coating, brush coating, roller coating, bar coating, and dip coating can be applied. .
Before applying the coating solution for forming the color-change layer B, the lower layer to which the coating solution for forming the color-change layer B is applied is subjected to corona discharge treatment, glow treatment, atmospheric pressure plasma treatment, flame treatment, and ultraviolet irradiation treatment. Etc. may be applied.
 色変化層B形成用塗布液の乾燥は、室温(25℃)で行ってもよく、加熱して行ってもよい。色変化層B形成用塗布液に含まれる有機溶剤を十分揮発させ、空隙を形成する塗布液の場合には、空隙を形成し、また、色変化層Bの光透過性及び着色抑制の観点、更には、樹脂基材の分解温度以下の温度で加熱する点から、40℃~200℃に加熱して行うことが好ましい。また、樹脂基材の熱変形を抑制する観点では、40℃~120℃に加熱して行うことがより好ましい。
 また、加熱を行う場合には、加熱時間は、特に制限はないが、1分~30分であることが好ましい。
Drying of the coating solution for forming the color change layer B may be performed at room temperature (25 ° C.) or may be performed by heating. In the case of a coating liquid that sufficiently volatilizes the organic solvent contained in the coating liquid for forming the color-change layer B and forms a void, a void is formed, and the light-transmitting property of the color-change layer B and the viewpoint of suppressing coloration, Further, from the viewpoint of heating at a temperature equal to or lower than the decomposition temperature of the resin base material, it is preferable to perform the heating by heating to 40 to 200 ° C. Further, from the viewpoint of suppressing thermal deformation of the resin base material, it is more preferable that the heating is performed at 40 ° C. to 120 ° C.
When heating is performed, the heating time is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes.
 以上、コアシェル粒子を含む色変化層B形成用塗布液と、この色変化層B形成用塗布液による色変化層Bの形成について説明したが、コアシェル粒子の代わりに中空粒子を含む色変化層B形成用塗布液を用いて、色変化層Bを形成してもよい。
 ここで、中空粒子としては、屈折率を1.5以下とする点において、シリカを主成分とする中空シリカ粒子を用いることが好ましい。
 中空シリカ粒子としては、特開2013-237593号公報、国際公開第2007/060884号などに記載される中空粒子などが挙げられる。
 また、中空シリカ粒子としては、表面が未修飾の中空シリカ粒子であっても、表面が変性されている中空シリカ粒子であってもよい。
 また、中空粒子は、色変化層B形成用塗布液中で、分散安定化を図るために、又はシロキサン樹脂との親和性、結合性を高めるために、プラズマ放電処理、コロナ放電処理等の物理的表面処理、界面活性剤、カップリング剤等による化学的表面処理がなされていてもよい。
In the above, the coating liquid for forming the color-change layer B containing the core-shell particles and the formation of the color-change layer B using the coating liquid for forming the color-change layer B have been described. The color changing layer B may be formed using a coating liquid for forming.
Here, as the hollow particles, it is preferable to use hollow silica particles containing silica as a main component, since the refractive index is 1.5 or less.
Examples of the hollow silica particles include hollow particles described in JP-A-2013-237593, WO 2007/060884, and the like.
The hollow silica particles may be unmodified hollow silica particles or hollow silica particles having a modified surface.
In addition, the hollow particles are subjected to physical discharge treatment such as plasma discharge treatment and corona discharge treatment in the coating liquid for forming the color change layer B in order to stabilize the dispersion or to increase the affinity and binding with the siloxane resin. Surface treatment, a chemical surface treatment with a surfactant, a coupling agent, or the like.
 上記色変化層Bにおける空隙率は、光透過性、及び、耐傷性の観点から、10%~80%であることが好ましく、15%~75%であることがより好ましく、20%~55%であることが特に好ましい。
 上記色変化層Bにおける空隙の径(以下、「空隙径」ともいう)は、強度、光透過性、及びヘーズの観点から、25nm以上であることが好ましく、30nm以上であることがより好ましい。空隙径の上限は、耐傷性の観点から、80nm以下であることが好ましく、70nm以下であることがより好ましい。
The porosity of the color change layer B is preferably from 10% to 80%, more preferably from 15% to 75%, and more preferably from 20% to 55%, from the viewpoint of light transmittance and scratch resistance. Is particularly preferred.
The diameter of the voids in the color change layer B (hereinafter, also referred to as “void diameter”) is preferably 25 nm or more, and more preferably 30 nm or more, from the viewpoints of strength, light transmittance, and haze. The upper limit of the void diameter is preferably 80 nm or less, more preferably 70 nm or less, from the viewpoint of scratch resistance.
 上記色変化層Bの空隙径、及び、空隙率の測定方法は、以下の通りである。
 上記色変化層Bが設けられた加飾フィルムをフィルム表面と直交する方向に切断し、切断面を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)で観察することにより、空隙径、及び、空隙率を測定する。
 切断面のSEM画像(倍率50,000倍)において、任意に選択した200個の空隙に対して、それぞれ円相当径を算出し、その平均値を空隙径とする。
 また、空隙率は、切断面のSEM画像(倍率50,000倍)について、画像処理ソフト(ImageJ)を用いて、空隙部分とマトリックス部分(即ち、シロキサン樹脂を含む空隙以外の部分)とを画像処理(二値化)を行い分離し、空隙部分の割合を算出して空隙率とする。
 なお、空隙の径に異方性がない場合、空隙率はシロキサン樹脂中における空隙の体積分率として求められる。
The method for measuring the pore diameter and the porosity of the color change layer B is as follows.
The decorative film provided with the color changing layer B is cut in a direction perpendicular to the film surface, and the cut surface is observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM) to measure the void diameter and the porosity.
In the SEM image of the cut surface (magnification: 50,000 times), the circle equivalent diameter is calculated for each of the 200 arbitrarily selected voids, and the average value is defined as the void diameter.
The porosity of the cut surface was determined by using an image processing software (ImageJ) for the SEM image of the cut surface (magnification: 50,000 times), using the image processing software (ImageJ) to determine the image of the void portion and the matrix portion (that is, the portion other than the void containing the siloxane resin). Processing (binarization) is performed and separated, and the ratio of the void portion is calculated to be the porosity.
In addition, when there is no anisotropy in the diameter of the void, the porosity is obtained as a volume fraction of the void in the siloxane resin.
〔樹脂層〕
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、上記着色層と上記色変化層Aとの密着性を向上させる観点から、上記着色層と上記色変化層Aとの間に、樹脂層を更に有することが好ましい。
 上記樹脂層は、上記色変化層Aとは異なる種類の樹脂を含む層であることが好ましい。
 上記樹脂層としては、色変化性の観点から、透明樹脂層であることが好ましく、透明フィルムからなる層であることがより好ましい。透明フィルム上に、上記色変化層Aを形成し、着色層にラミネートすることで、加飾フィルムを容易に作製することができる。
 透明フィルムとしては、必要な強度と耐傷性とを有する透明フィルムであれば特に制限されない。
 本開示において、透明フィルムにおける「透明」とは、全光透過率が85%以上であることを指す。透明フィルムの全光透過率は、既述の仮支持体の全光透過率と同様の方法により測定することができる。
(Resin layer)
The decorative film according to the present disclosure preferably further includes a resin layer between the colored layer and the color changing layer A, from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion between the colored layer and the color changing layer A. .
The resin layer is preferably a layer containing a different type of resin from the color change layer A.
The resin layer is preferably a transparent resin layer from the viewpoint of color change, and more preferably a layer made of a transparent film. By forming the color change layer A on a transparent film and laminating it on a colored layer, a decorative film can be easily produced.
The transparent film is not particularly limited as long as it has the necessary strength and scratch resistance.
In the present disclosure, “transparent” in a transparent film indicates that the total light transmittance is 85% or more. The total light transmittance of the transparent film can be measured by the same method as the above-mentioned total light transmittance of the temporary support.
 透明フィルムは、透明な樹脂を製膜して得られたフィルムが好ましく、具体的には、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)樹脂、ポリエチレンナフタレート(PEN)樹脂、アクリル樹脂、ポリカーボネート(PC)樹脂、トリアセチルセルロース(TAC)、シクロオレフィンポリマー(COP)等の樹脂を含む樹脂フィルムが挙げられる。
 特に、金型に対する形状追従性の点から、アクリル樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、又はポリエチレンテレフタレート樹脂を、透明フィルムに含まれる全樹脂成分に対して60質量%以上(より好ましくは80質量%以上、更に好ましくは100質量%)含む樹脂フィルムが好ましい。特に、アクリル樹脂を透明フィルムに含まれる全樹脂成分に対して60質量%以上(より好ましくは80質量%以上、更に好ましくは100質量%)含む樹脂フィルムがより好ましい。
 また、上記樹脂層の厚みは、特に制限はないが、50μm~150μmが好ましい。
The transparent film is preferably a film obtained by forming a transparent resin. Specifically, polyethylene terephthalate (PET) resin, polyethylene naphthalate (PEN) resin, acrylic resin, polycarbonate (PC) resin, triacetyl A resin film containing a resin such as cellulose (TAC) or cycloolefin polymer (COP) may be used.
In particular, from the viewpoint of shape followability to a mold, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or a polyethylene terephthalate resin is used in an amount of 60% by mass or more (more preferably 80% by mass or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more based on all resin components contained in the transparent film). Is preferably 100% by mass). In particular, a resin film containing 60% by mass or more (more preferably 80% by mass or more, more preferably 100% by mass) of an acrylic resin with respect to all resin components contained in the transparent film is more preferable.
The thickness of the resin layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50 μm to 150 μm.
 透明フィルムとしては、市販品を用いてもよく、市販品としては、例えば、アクリプレン(登録商標)HBS010(アクリル樹脂フィルム、三菱ケミカル(株)製)、テクノロイ(登録商標)S001G(アクリル樹脂フィルム、住友化学(株)製)、C000(ポリカーボネート樹脂フィルム、住友化学(株)製)、C001(アクリル樹脂/ポリカーボネート樹脂積層フィルム、住友化学(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Commercially available products may be used as the transparent film. Examples of the commercially available products include Acryprene (registered trademark) HBS010 (acrylic resin film, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) and Technoroy (registered trademark) S001G (acrylic resin film, Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.), C000 (polycarbonate resin film, Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.), C001 (acrylic resin / polycarbonate resin laminated film, Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like.
-樹脂層の形成-
 樹脂層の形成方法としては、特に制限はないが、透明フィルムを上記着色層にラミネートする方法が好ましく挙げられる。
 透明フィルムをラミネートする際に用いられる装置としては、ラミネーター、真空ラミネーター、及び、より生産性を高めることができるオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターを使用することができる。
 ラミネーターはゴムローラーなどの任意の加熱可能なローラーを備え、加圧及び加熱ができるものであることが好ましい。
 ラミネーターからの加熱により、透明フィルム及び着色層の少なくとも一方が一部溶融し、着色層と透明フィルムとの間の密着性を更に高めることができる。
-Formation of resin layer-
The method for forming the resin layer is not particularly limited, but preferably includes a method of laminating a transparent film on the colored layer.
As a device used for laminating the transparent film, a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator capable of further increasing the productivity can be used.
The laminator is preferably provided with an optional heatable roller such as a rubber roller, and can be pressurized and heated.
By the heating from the laminator, at least one of the transparent film and the colored layer is partially melted, and the adhesion between the colored layer and the transparent film can be further increased.
 透明フィルムをラミネートする際の温度は、透明フィルムの材質及び着色層の溶融温度等に応じて決定されればよいが、透明フィルムの温度を、60℃~150℃としうる温度であることが好ましく、65℃~130℃としうる温度であることがより好ましく、70℃~100℃としうる温度であることが特に好ましい。 The temperature at the time of laminating the transparent film may be determined according to the material of the transparent film, the melting temperature of the colored layer, and the like, but it is preferable that the temperature of the transparent film be 60 ° C. to 150 ° C. , 65 ° C to 130 ° C, more preferably 70 ° C to 100 ° C.
 また、透明フィルムをラミネートする際、透明フィルムと着色層との間には、線圧60N/cm~200N/cmをかけることが好ましく、線圧70N/cm~160N/cmをかけることがより好ましく、線圧80N/cm~120N/cmをかけることが特に好ましい。 When laminating the transparent film, it is preferable to apply a linear pressure of 60 N / cm to 200 N / cm between the transparent film and the coloring layer, and more preferably to apply a linear pressure of 70 N / cm to 160 N / cm. It is particularly preferable to apply a linear pressure of 80 N / cm to 120 N / cm.
〔粘着層〕
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、上記仮支持体と上記着色層との間に、加飾フィルムを貼り付ける基材への接着性の観点から、粘着層を有していてもよい。
 また、後述するように、基材への貼り付けの前に、上記仮支持体を剥離し、上記仮支持体を剥離した上記加飾フィルムの上記着色層側の最外層上に、粘着層を形成し、その後、基材へ貼り付けてもよい。
 粘着層の材料としては、特に制限はなく、目的に応じて適宜選択することができる
 例えば、公知の粘着剤又は接着剤を含む層が挙げられる。
(Adhesive layer)
The decorative film according to the present disclosure may have a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer between the temporary support and the colored layer from the viewpoint of adhesiveness to a substrate to which the decorative film is to be attached.
Further, as described later, before the attachment to the base material, the temporary support is peeled off, and the adhesive layer is formed on the outermost layer on the colored layer side of the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off. It may be formed and then attached to a substrate.
The material of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose. For example, a layer containing a known adhesive or adhesive can be used.
-粘着剤-
 粘着剤の例としては、アクリル系粘着剤、ゴム系粘着剤、シリコーン系粘着剤などが挙げられる。また、粘着剤の例として、「剥離紙・剥離フィルムおよび粘着テープの特性評価とその制御技術」、情報機構、2004年、第2章に記載のアクリル系粘着剤、紫外線(UV)硬化型粘着剤、シリコーン粘着剤等が挙げられる。なお、アクリル系粘着剤とは、(メタ)アクリルモノマーの重合体((メタ)アクリルポリマー)を含む粘着剤をいう。
 粘着剤を含む場合には、更に、粘着付与剤が含まれていてもよい。
-Adhesive-
Examples of the pressure-sensitive adhesive include an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive, a rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, and a silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive. Examples of the pressure-sensitive adhesive include acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesives described in Chapter 2 of "Evaluation of Properties of Release Papers / Release Films and Pressure-Sensitive Tapes and Their Control Techniques", Jikken, 2004, Chapter 2, and ultraviolet (UV) curable adhesives. Agents, silicone adhesives and the like. The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive refers to a pressure-sensitive adhesive containing a polymer of a (meth) acrylic monomer ((meth) acrylic polymer).
When an adhesive is included, a tackifier may be further included.
-接着剤-
 接着剤としては、例えば、ウレタン樹脂接着剤、ポリエステル接着剤、アクリル樹脂接着剤、エチレン酢酸ビニル樹脂接着剤、ポリビニルアルコール接着剤、ポリアミド接着剤、シリコーン接着剤等が挙げられる。接着強度がより高いという観点から、ウレタン樹脂接着剤又はシリコーン接着剤が好ましい。
-adhesive-
Examples of the adhesive include a urethane resin adhesive, a polyester adhesive, an acrylic resin adhesive, an ethylene vinyl acetate resin adhesive, a polyvinyl alcohol adhesive, a polyamide adhesive, and a silicone adhesive. From the viewpoint of higher adhesive strength, urethane resin adhesives or silicone adhesives are preferred.
-粘着層の形成方法-
 粘着層の形成方法としては、特に限定されず、粘着層が形成された保護フィルムを、粘着層と着色層とが接するようにラミネートする方法、粘着層を単独で着色層に接するようにラミネートする方法、上記粘着剤又は接着剤を含む組成物を着色層上に塗布する方法等が挙げられる。ラミネート方法又は塗布方法としては、上述の透明フィルムのラミネート方法又は着色層形成用組成物の塗布方法と同様の方法が好ましく挙げられる。
-Method of forming adhesive layer-
The method for forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited, and a method of laminating the protective film on which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is formed so that the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the colored layer are in contact with each other, and laminating the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer alone so as to be in contact with the colored layer. And a method of applying a composition containing the above-mentioned pressure-sensitive adhesive or adhesive on the colored layer. As a laminating method or a coating method, a method similar to the above-described method of laminating a transparent film or a method of applying a composition for forming a colored layer is preferably exemplified.
 加飾フィルムにおける粘着層の厚みとしては、粘着力及びハンドリング性の両立の点で、5μm~100μmが好ましい。 (4) The thickness of the adhesive layer in the decorative film is preferably 5 μm to 100 μm from the viewpoint of coexistence of adhesive strength and handleability.
〔その他の層〕
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、上述した以外のその他の層を有していてもよい。
 その他の層としては、加飾フィルムにおいて公知の層である、反射層、自己修復層、帯電防止層、防汚層、防電磁波層、導電性層などが挙げられる。
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムにおけるその他の層は公知の方法により形成することができる。例えば、これらの層に含まれる成分を含む組成物(層形成用組成物)を層状に付与し、乾燥する方法等が挙げられる。
[Other layers]
The decorative film according to the present disclosure may have other layers other than those described above.
Examples of the other layers include a reflective layer, a self-healing layer, an antistatic layer, an antifouling layer, an anti-electromagnetic wave layer, and a conductive layer, which are known layers in the decorative film.
Other layers in the decorative film according to the present disclosure can be formed by a known method. For example, there is a method in which a composition containing the components contained in these layers (layer-forming composition) is applied in the form of a layer and dried.
-カバーフィルム-
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、上記色変化層B側の最外層として、汚れの防止等を目的として、カバーフィルムを有していてもよい。
 カバーフィルムとしては、可撓性を有し、剥離性が良好な材料であれば特に制限なく使用され、ポリエチレンフィルム等の樹脂フィルム等が挙げられる。
 カバーフィルムの貼り付け方法としては、特に制限されず、公知の貼り付け方法が挙げられ、カバーフィルムを色変化層B上にラミネートする方法等が挙げられる。
-Cover film-
The decorative film according to the present disclosure may have a cover film as an outermost layer on the color change layer B side for the purpose of preventing contamination and the like.
The cover film is not particularly limited as long as it has flexibility and good releasability, and examples thereof include resin films such as polyethylene films.
The method for attaching the cover film is not particularly limited, and includes a known attaching method, such as a method of laminating the cover film on the color changing layer B.
(加飾成型フィルム)
 本開示に係る加飾成型フィルムは、基材、着色層、色変化層A、及び、色変化層Bをこの順に有し、上記色変化層Bが、上記色変化層Aよりも屈折率が0.1以上低い層である。
 本開示に係る加飾成型フィルムにおける着色層、色変化層A、及び、色変化層Bは、本開示に係る加飾フィルムにおける着色層、色変化層A、及び、色変化層Bと同様であり、また、好ましい態様も同様である。更に、その他の層についての好ましい態様も同様である。
 本開示に係る加飾成型フィルムにおける基材は、フィルム基材であることが好ましい。 また、本開示に係る加飾成型フィルムにおける基材は、成型用基材であることが特に好ましい。基材としては、後述する基材と同様であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 また、本開示に係る加飾成型フィルムの製造方法は、後述する本開示に係る加飾方法における基材に貼り付ける方法を参照することができる。
(Decorative molded film)
The decorative molded film according to the present disclosure has a base material, a coloring layer, a color changing layer A, and a color changing layer B in this order, and the color changing layer B has a refractive index higher than that of the color changing layer A. It is a layer lower than 0.1.
The coloring layer, the color changing layer A, and the color changing layer B in the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure are the same as the coloring layer, the color changing layer A, and the color changing layer B in the decorative film according to the present disclosure. Yes, and the preferred embodiment is also the same. Further, the preferred embodiments of the other layers are also the same.
The substrate in the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure is preferably a film substrate. Moreover, it is particularly preferable that the substrate in the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure is a molding substrate. The substrate is the same as the substrate described below, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
In addition, for the method of manufacturing a decorative molded film according to the present disclosure, a method of attaching to a base material in a decorative method according to the present disclosure described later can be referred to.
(加飾方法、及び、加飾物)
 本開示に係る加飾方法は、本開示に係る加飾フィルムを用いた加飾方法であれば、特に制限はないが、本開示に係る加飾フィルムから上記仮支持体を剥離する工程と、上記仮支持体を剥離した上記加飾フィルムを上記着色層側から基材に貼り付ける工程とを含むことが好ましく、上記仮支持体を剥離した上記加飾フィルムにおける上記仮支持体を剥離した面に粘着層を形成する工程を更に含むことがより好ましい。
 本開示に係る加飾物は、本開示に係る加飾フィルムを用いた加飾物であり、本開示に係る加飾方法により得られた加飾物であることが好ましい。
(Decoration method and decoration)
The decorating method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a decorating method using the decorative film according to the present disclosure, and a step of peeling the temporary support from the decorative film according to the present disclosure, Affixing the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off to the substrate from the colored layer side, preferably the surface from which the temporary support has been peeled off in the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off. It is more preferable that the method further includes a step of forming an adhesive layer.
The decorative article according to the present disclosure is a decorative article using the decorative film according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a decorative article obtained by the decorating method according to the present disclosure.
-上記仮支持体を剥離する工程-
 本開示に係る加飾方法は、本開示に係る加飾フィルムから上記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含むことが好ましい。
 剥離方法としては、特に制限はなく、公知の方法により剥離すればよい。例えば、仮支持体の一部を指又はピンセット等の基材を用いて把持して剥離する方法が挙げられる。
-Step of peeling off the temporary support-
The decorating method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of peeling the temporary support from the decorative film according to the present disclosure.
The peeling method is not particularly limited, and may be a known method. For example, there is a method in which a part of the temporary support is gripped and peeled using a base material such as a finger or tweezers.
-粘着層を形成する工程-
 本開示に係る加飾方法は、上記仮支持体を剥離した上記加飾フィルムにおける上記仮支持体を剥離した面に粘着層を形成する工程(単に、「粘着層を形成する工程」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましい。
 粘着層、及び、粘着層の形成方法としては、上述した粘着層、及び、粘着層の形成方法と同様であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
-Step of forming an adhesive layer-
The decorating method according to the present disclosure includes a step of forming an adhesive layer on a surface of the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled, from which the temporary support has been peeled (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “step of forming an adhesive layer”). ) Is preferable.
The method for forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is the same as the method for forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer described above, and the preferable embodiments are also the same.
-基材に貼り付ける工程-
 本開示に係る加飾方法は、上記仮支持体を剥離した上記加飾フィルムを上記着色層側から基材に貼り付ける工程(単に、「基材に貼り付ける工程」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記基材に貼り付ける工程においては、上記仮支持体を剥離した上記加飾フィルムを上記着色層側の最外層と基材とを貼り付ければよく、例えば、上記仮支持体を剥離した上記加飾フィルムの上記着色層又は上記粘着層と基材とを貼り付ければよい。
-Process of sticking to base material-
The decorating method according to the present disclosure includes a step of sticking the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off to the substrate from the colored layer side (also simply referred to as a “step of sticking to the substrate”). Is preferred.
In the step of attaching to the base material, the decorative film from which the temporary support has been removed may be attached to the outermost layer on the colored layer side and the base material. What is necessary is just to stick the said coloring layer or the said adhesive layer of a decorative film, and a base material.
 上記基材としては、特に制限はなく、所望の基材を用いることができる。具体的には、例えば、自動車、家電製品、オーディオ製品、コンピュータ、ディスプレイ、車載製品、時計、アクセサリー、光学部品、扉、窓ガラス、建材等が挙げられる。
 中でも、本開示に係る加飾方法は、自動車外装の加飾方法として好適に用いることができる。
The substrate is not particularly limited, and a desired substrate can be used. Specific examples include automobiles, home appliances, audio products, computers, displays, in-vehicle products, watches, accessories, optical components, doors, window glasses, building materials, and the like.
Above all, the decorating method according to the present disclosure can be suitably used as a decorating method for an automobile exterior.
 また、上記基材としては、成型用基材を好適に用いることができる。
 成型用基材は、立体成型、インサート成型等の成型に用いられる基材として従来公知のものが特に制限なく使用でき、加飾フィルムの用途、インサート成型への適性等に応じて、適宜、選択されればよい。
 また、成型用基材の形状及び材質は、特に制限はなく、所望に応じ適宜選択すればよいが、インサート成型容易性の観点から、フィルム基材であることが好ましい。
In addition, a molding substrate can be suitably used as the substrate.
As the molding substrate, a conventionally known substrate used for molding such as three-dimensional molding and insert molding can be used without any particular limitation. It should be done.
The shape and material of the molding substrate are not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected as desired. However, from the viewpoint of ease of insert molding, a film substrate is preferable.
 成型用基材として具体的には、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)樹脂、ポリエチレンナフタレート(PEN)樹脂、アクリル樹脂、ポリカーボネート(PC)樹脂、トリアセチルセルロース(TAC)、シクロオレフィンポリマー(COP)、アクリロニトリル/ブタジエン/スチレン共重合樹脂(ABS樹脂)等の樹脂を含む樹脂フィルムが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the molding substrate include polyethylene terephthalate (PET) resin, polyethylene naphthalate (PEN) resin, acrylic resin, polycarbonate (PC) resin, triacetyl cellulose (TAC), cycloolefin polymer (COP), A resin film containing a resin such as an acrylonitrile / butadiene / styrene copolymer resin (ABS resin) is exemplified.
 成型用基材は、立体成型、インサート成型への適性、特に金型への追従性に優れる点から、成型用基材に含まれる全樹脂成分に対して60質量%以上のアクリロニトリル/ブタジエン/スチレン共重合樹脂(ABS樹脂)を含む樹脂フィルムが好ましい。成型用基材に含まれる全樹脂成分に対するABS樹脂の含有量は、80質量%以上がより好ましく、100質量%(即ち、樹脂成分の全てがABS樹脂)であってもよい。 The base material for molding is acrylonitrile / butadiene / styrene in an amount of 60% by mass or more based on all resin components contained in the base material for molding because of its suitability for three-dimensional molding and insert molding, and particularly excellent followability to a mold. A resin film containing a copolymer resin (ABS resin) is preferable. The content of the ABS resin with respect to all the resin components contained in the molding base is more preferably 80% by mass or more, and may be 100% by mass (that is, all of the resin components are the ABS resin).
 成型用基材は、必要に応じ、上述した樹脂以外の添加物を含有していてもよい。
 このような添加物としては、例えば、鉱油、炭化水素、脂肪酸、アルコール、脂肪酸エステル、脂肪酸アミド、金属石けん、天然ワックス、シリコーンなどの潤滑剤、水酸化マグネシウム、水酸化アルミニウム等の無機難燃剤、ハロゲン系、リン系等の有機難燃剤、金属粉、タルク、炭酸カルシウム、チタン酸カリウム、ガラス繊維、カーボン繊維、木粉等の有機又は無機の充填剤、酸化防止剤、紫外線防止剤、滑剤、分散剤、カップリング剤、発泡剤、着色剤等の添加剤、ポリオレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリフェニレンエーテル樹脂等であって、上述した樹脂以外のエンジニアリングプラスチックなどが挙げられる。
The molding base material may contain additives other than the above-described resins, if necessary.
Examples of such additives include mineral oils, hydrocarbons, fatty acids, alcohols, fatty acid esters, fatty acid amides, metal soaps, natural waxes, lubricants such as silicones, magnesium hydroxide, inorganic flame retardants such as aluminum hydroxide, Organic or inorganic fillers such as halogen-based, phosphorus-based organic flame retardants, metal powder, talc, calcium carbonate, potassium titanate, glass fiber, carbon fiber, and wood powder, antioxidants, UV inhibitors, lubricants, Additives such as dispersants, coupling agents, foaming agents, coloring agents, etc., polyolefin resins, polyester resins, polyacetal resins, polyamide resins, polyphenylene ether resins, and the like, and engineering plastics other than the above-mentioned resins.
 成型用基材は、市販品を用いてもよい。
 市販品としては、例えば、ABSフィルム(オカモト(株)製)、ABSシート(積水成型工業(株)製)、テフレックス(登録商標)シリーズ(PETフィルム、帝人フィルムソリューション(株)製)、ルミラー(登録商標)易成型タイプ(PETフィルム、東レ(株)製)等を挙げることができる。
A commercially available product may be used as the molding substrate.
Commercially available products include, for example, ABS film (manufactured by Okamoto Corporation), ABS sheet (manufactured by Sekisui Molding Industry Co., Ltd.), Teflex (registered trademark) series (PET film, manufactured by Teijin Film Solutions Ltd.), Lumirror (Registered trademark) easy-molding type (PET film, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) and the like.
 成型用基材の厚みは、作製する加飾成型体の用途、インサート成型への適性、シートの取り扱い性等に応じて決定され、特に制限はないが、100μm~800μmが好ましく、150μm~600μmがより好ましい。 The thickness of the molding substrate is determined according to the use of the decorative molded article to be produced, suitability for insert molding, handleability of the sheet, etc., and is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 μm to 800 μm, and more preferably 150 μm to 600 μm. More preferred.
-貼り付け方法-
 基材に貼り付ける方法としては、特に限定されず、公知の方法を用いることができる。
 例えば、必要に応じて粘着層の保護フィルムを剥離した後に、粘着層に基材をラミネートする方法が挙げられる。
 ラミネート方法としては、特に制限されず、例えば、上述した透明フィルムのラミネート方法と同様の方法が用いられる。
-Pasting method-
There is no particular limitation on the method of attaching the substrate to the substrate, and a known method can be used.
For example, a method of laminating a base material on the adhesive layer after peeling off the protective film of the adhesive layer as needed is mentioned.
The laminating method is not particularly limited, and for example, the same method as the above-described method for laminating a transparent film is used.
-露光工程-
 本開示に係る加飾方法においては、必要に応じて、着色層を露光する工程、色変化層Aを露光する工程、又は、色変化層Bを露光する工程(あわせて、「露光工程」ともいう。)を含んでもよい。
 着色層を露光する場合、着色層は重合性化合物及び光重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。重合性化合物及び光重合開始剤を含む着色層を露光することにより、硬化した着色層を得ることができる。
 また、着色層が重合性化合物及び光重合開始剤を含む場合、加飾フィルムの製造方法においては露光を行わずに、基材と粘着層とが接するように保護フィルム剥離後の加飾フィルムを貼り付けた後に露光してもよい。上記方法によれば、基材と保護フィルム剥離後の加飾フィルムとの密着力により優れる。
 着色層について述べたが、色変化層A及び色変化層Bについても、同様である。
-Exposure process-
In the decorating method according to the present disclosure, as necessary, a step of exposing the colored layer, a step of exposing the color changing layer A, or a step of exposing the color changing layer B (also referred to as an “exposure step”) ).
When the colored layer is exposed, the colored layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator. By exposing the colored layer containing the polymerizable compound and the photopolymerization initiator, a cured colored layer can be obtained.
Further, when the colored layer contains a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator, in the method for producing a decorative film, without performing exposure, the decorative film after the protective film is peeled off so that the substrate and the adhesive layer are in contact with each other. Exposure may be performed after sticking. According to the above method, the adhesive strength between the base material and the decorative film after peeling off the protective film is excellent.
Although the colored layer has been described, the same applies to the color changing layer A and the color changing layer B.
-露光タイミング-
 本開示に係る加飾方法が露光工程を含む場合、露光工程を行うタイミングは特に制限はなく、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程の前であっても、上記粘着層を形成する工程の前であっても、上記基材に貼り付ける工程の前であっても、上記基材に貼り付ける工程の後であってもよいが、各層間における密着性を向上させる観点から、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程の前に行われることが好ましい。
 また、粘着層のラミネート性の観点からは、露光工程は、上記粘着層を形成する工程の前に行われることが好ましい。
 更に、加熱時の延性が必要な場合における成型容易性の観点からは、露光工程は、基材に貼りつける工程の後に行われることが好ましい。
-Exposure timing-
When the decorating method according to the present disclosure includes an exposure step, the timing of performing the exposure step is not particularly limited, even before the step of peeling the temporary support, before the step of forming the adhesive layer. Even if it is before the step of attaching to the substrate, it may be after the step of attaching to the substrate, from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion between the layers, the temporary support It is preferably performed before the peeling step.
Further, from the viewpoint of the laminating property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the exposure step is preferably performed before the step of forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
Further, from the viewpoint of ease of molding when ductility at the time of heating is required, it is preferable that the exposure step is performed after the step of sticking to the substrate.
-露光方法-
 露光工程における露光は、上記色変化層A又は上記樹脂層と硬化後の着色層との密着性を向上させる観点からは、上記色変化層Bの側から行うことが好ましい。
 また、上記仮支持体を有する状態(仮支持体の剥離前)で露光する場合、上記仮支持体側から露光を行ってもよいし、上記色変化層B側と上記仮支持体側の両面から露光を行ってもよい。上記仮支持体側から露光が行われる場合、上述の通り、仮支持体の全光透過率は80%以上であることが好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましい。
 上記仮支持体を剥離する工程の後に露光を行う場合、剥離された上記仮支持体の側から露光を行ってもよいし、上記色変化層B側と剥離された仮支持体側の両面から露光を行ってもよい。この場合、剥離された仮支持体側には粘着層が形成されていてもよいし、更に保護フィルムを有していてもよい。
 保護フィルムを通して露光が行われる場合、上述の通り、保護フィルムの全光透過率は80%以上であることが好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましい。
-Exposure method-
The exposure in the exposure step is preferably performed from the color change layer B side from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion between the color change layer A or the resin layer and the cured colored layer.
When exposing in the state having the temporary support (before peeling of the temporary support), the exposure may be performed from the temporary support side, or may be performed from both the color change layer B side and the temporary support side. May be performed. When exposure is performed from the temporary support side, as described above, the total light transmittance of the temporary support is preferably 80% or more, more preferably 90% or more.
When exposure is performed after the step of peeling the temporary support, exposure may be performed from the side of the temporary support that has been peeled, or exposure may be performed from both sides of the color change layer B and the temporary support that has been peeled. May be performed. In this case, an adhesive layer may be formed on the separated temporary support, or a protective film may be further provided.
When exposure is performed through a protective film, as described above, the total light transmittance of the protective film is preferably 80% or more, and more preferably 90% or more.
 露光方法としては、例えば、特開2006-23696号公報の段落0035~0051に記載の方法を本開示においても好適に用いることができる。 As the exposure method, for example, the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
 露光の光源としては、重合性化合物を硬化しうる波長域の光(例えば、365nm、405nm)を照射できる光源であれば適宜選定して用いることができる。
 具体的には、超高圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、メタルハライドランプ等が挙げられる。
 露光量としては、特に制限はなく、適宜設定すればよく、5mJ/cm~2,000mJ/cmであることが好ましく、10mJ/cm~1,000mJ/cmであることがより好ましい。
As a light source for exposure, a light source capable of irradiating light (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm) in a wavelength range capable of curing a polymerizable compound can be appropriately selected and used.
Specifically, an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp and the like can be mentioned.
The exposure amount is not particularly limited and may be appropriately set, is preferably 5mJ / cm 2 ~ 2,000mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ~ 1,000mJ / cm 2 .
 なお、本工程においては、例えば、着色層中の全ての重合性化合物が反応する必要はなく、露光後の着色層中には、未重合の重合性化合物と重合性化合物の重合体とが共存する状態であってもよい。
 露光後の着色層中に、特定重合性化合物と特定重合性化合物の重合体とが共存する状態、成型後に得られた加飾成型体を更に露光することで、層間密着性(上記着色層と上記色変化層Bとの間及び上記着色層と基材との間の密着性)を更に向上させてもよい。
 色変化層A及び色変化層Bについても、同様である。
In this step, for example, it is not necessary that all the polymerizable compounds in the colored layer react, and the unpolymerized polymerizable compound and the polymer of the polymerizable compound coexist in the colored layer after exposure. It may be in the state of doing.
In the colored layer after the exposure, the state in which the specific polymerizable compound and the polymer of the specific polymerizable compound coexist, and the decorative molded body obtained after the molding is further exposed, whereby the interlayer adhesiveness (with the colored layer and The adhesion between the color change layer B and the adhesion between the colored layer and the substrate may be further improved.
The same applies to the color change layer A and the color change layer B.
 ここで、加飾フィルムの層構成の一例について図1を用いて説明する。
 図1は、本開示に係る加飾フィルムの層構成の一例を示す概略断面図である。
 加飾フィルム20は、仮支持体22上に着色層24を有し、着色層24上に樹脂層26を有する。また、樹脂層26は、着色層24と反対側の面に色変化層A28と色変化層B30とを有する。樹脂層26は任意の層であり、加飾フィルム20に含まれていなくともよい。
 また、図示は省略したが、仮支持体22と着色層24との間には、上述の剥離層を有していてもよい。
Here, an example of the layer configuration of the decorative film will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating an example of a layer configuration of a decorative film according to the present disclosure.
The decorative film 20 has a colored layer 24 on the temporary support 22 and a resin layer 26 on the colored layer 24. The resin layer 26 has a color change layer A28 and a color change layer B30 on the surface opposite to the color layer 24. The resin layer 26 is an arbitrary layer and does not need to be included in the decorative film 20.
Although not shown, the above-described release layer may be provided between the temporary support 22 and the colored layer 24.
 図2は、本開示に係る加加飾フィルムの他の一例を示す概略断面図である。
 加飾フィルム10は、粘着層12上に着色層24を有し、着色層24上に樹脂層26と、色変化層A28と、色変化層B30とをこの順に有する。
 また、粘着層12の着色層24と反対側には保護フィルム14を有する。
 粘着層12と、保護フィルム14と、樹脂層26とは任意の層であり、加飾フィルム10に含まれていなくともよい。
FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating another example of the decorative film according to the present disclosure.
The decorative film 10 has a coloring layer 24 on the adhesive layer 12, and has a resin layer 26, a color changing layer A28, and a color changing layer B30 on the coloring layer 24 in this order.
The protective film 14 is provided on the side of the adhesive layer 12 opposite to the colored layer 24.
The adhesive layer 12, the protective film 14, and the resin layer 26 are optional layers, and need not be included in the decorative film 10.
 図3は、本開示に係る加飾成型フィルムの一例を示す概略断面図である。
 加飾成型フィルム40は、成型用基材16上に粘着層12と、着色層24と、樹脂層26と、色変化層A28と、色変化層B30とをこの順に有する。
 粘着層12と樹脂層26とは任意の層であり、加飾成型フィルム40に含まれていなくともよい。
FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating an example of the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure.
The decorative molded film 40 has an adhesive layer 12, a colored layer 24, a resin layer 26, a color change layer A28, and a color change layer B30 in this order on the base material 16 for molding.
The adhesive layer 12 and the resin layer 26 are optional layers, and need not be included in the decorative molding film 40.
(加飾成型体の製造方法、及び、加飾成型体)
 本開示に係る加飾成型体の製造方法は、本開示に係る加飾フィルムを用い加飾及び成型を行い加飾成型体を製造する方法であればよく、本開示に係る加飾フィルムから上記仮支持体を剥離する工程と、上記仮支持体を剥離した上記加飾フィルムを上記着色層側から成型用基材に貼り付ける工程と、上記加飾フィルムが貼り付いた上記成型用基材を成型する工程とを含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係る加飾成型体は、本開示に係る加飾フィルム又は本開示に加飾成型フィルムを用いて得られた加飾成型体であり、本開示に係る加飾成型体の製造方法により製造されたものであることが好ましい。
 本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、立体成型性にも優れるため、加飾成型体の製造に好適に用いることができ、例えば、立体成型、及び、インサート成型よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の成型により加飾成型体を製造する際に特に好適である。
 また、本開示に係る加飾フィルムは、成型後の成型体に貼り付けることにより加飾成型体とすることも可能である。
 本開示に係る加飾成型フィルムは、立体成型性にも優れるため、加飾成型体の製造に好適に用いることができる。例えば、成型体が樹脂である場合には、例えば、立体成型、及び、インサート成型よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の成型により加飾成型体を製造する際に特に好適である。また、成型体が金属などの溶融しない材料である場合には、立体成型より加飾成型体を製造する際に特に好適である。
 加飾成型体の作製に際して、本開示に係る加飾フィルムを用いることで、より複雑な形状、より小さな形状等の金型にも適用可能となり、加飾成型体の用途の幅を広げることができる。
 以下、インサート成型を例に挙げて加飾成型体の作製方法について詳述する。
(Production method of decorative molded body and decorative molded body)
The method for manufacturing a decorative molded body according to the present disclosure may be any method for manufacturing a decorative molded body by performing decoration and molding using the decorative film according to the present disclosure. A step of peeling off the temporary support, a step of sticking the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off to the molding base from the colored layer side, and the molding base on which the decorative film is stuck. And a molding step.
The decorative molded body according to the present disclosure is a decorative film obtained by using the decorative film according to the present disclosure or the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure. It is preferably manufactured.
Since the decorative film according to the present disclosure is also excellent in three-dimensional moldability, it can be suitably used for the production of a decorative molded body. For example, three-dimensional molding, and at least one selected from the group consisting of insert molding It is particularly suitable when producing a decorative molded body by molding.
Further, the decorative film according to the present disclosure can be made into a decorative molded body by sticking to a molded body after molding.
The decorative molded film according to the present disclosure is also excellent in three-dimensional moldability, and thus can be suitably used for the production of a decorative molded body. For example, when the molded body is a resin, it is particularly suitable, for example, when manufacturing a decorative molded body by at least one type of molding selected from the group consisting of three-dimensional molding and insert molding. Further, when the molded body is a material that does not melt, such as metal, it is particularly suitable when a decorative molded body is manufactured by three-dimensional molding.
By using the decorative film according to the present disclosure during the production of the decorative molded body, it is possible to apply it to a mold having a more complicated shape, a smaller shape, and the like, thereby expanding the range of applications of the decorative molded body. it can.
Hereinafter, a method for producing a decorative molded body will be described in detail by taking insert molding as an example.
 インサート成型において、加飾成型体は、例えば、金型内に加飾成型フィルムを予め配置して、その金型内に基材樹脂を射出成型することにより得られる。このインサート成型により、樹脂成型体の表面に加飾フィルムが一体化された加飾成型体が得られる。 In the insert molding, the decorative molded body is obtained by, for example, disposing a decorative molded film in a mold in advance and injection molding a base resin in the mold. By this insert molding, a decorative molded body in which the decorative film is integrated with the surface of the resin molded body is obtained.
 また、加飾成型体の作製に際して、加飾成型フィルムと樹脂成型体との間には、接着剤層を設けてもよい。
 接着剤層を形成する接着剤としては、公知の接着剤を適宜選択することができる。具体的には、例えば、塩化ビニル/酢酸ビニル共重合体及びアクリル樹脂を含む接着剤が挙げられる。
 接着剤は市販品を用いてもよく、市販品としては、帝国インキ社のIMB-003などが挙げられる。
Further, at the time of producing the decorative molded body, an adhesive layer may be provided between the decorative molded film and the resin molded body.
As the adhesive for forming the adhesive layer, a known adhesive can be appropriately selected. Specifically, for example, an adhesive containing a vinyl chloride / vinyl acetate copolymer and an acrylic resin may be used.
A commercially available adhesive may be used, and examples of the commercially available adhesive include IMB-003 manufactured by Teikoku Ink.
 以下、インサート成型による加飾成型体の作製方法の一実施態様を説明する。
 加飾成型体の作製方法は、射出成型用の金型内に、一定寸法の四辺形に形成されている加飾成型フィルムを配置して型閉めを行う工程、その後、溶融樹脂を金型内に射出する工程、更に、射出樹脂が固化したところで取り出す工程を含む。
Hereinafter, one embodiment of a method for producing a decorative molded body by insert molding will be described.
The method for producing a decorative molded body is a step of placing a decorative molded film formed into a quadrilateral of a certain dimension in a mold for injection molding and closing the mold, and then putting the molten resin in the mold. And a step of taking out when the injected resin is solidified.
 加飾成型体の製造に用いる射出成型用の金型(即ち、成型金型)は、凸形状を有する金型(即ち、雄型)と凸形状に対応する凹形状を有する金型(即ち、雌型)を備えており、雌型の内周面となる成型面に加飾成型フィルムを配置した後に、型閉めを行う。 A mold for injection molding (that is, a molding die) used for manufacturing a decorative molded body includes a mold having a convex shape (that is, a male mold) and a mold having a concave shape corresponding to the convex shape (that is, a mold). After the decorative molding film is disposed on the molding surface that is the inner peripheral surface of the female mold, the mold is closed.
 ここで、成型金型内に加飾成型フィルムを配置する前には、加飾成型フィルムを、成型金型を用いて加飾成型フィルムを成型(プレフォーム)することにより、加飾成型フィルムに予め三次元形状を付与しておき、成型金型に供給することも可能である。
 また、成型金型内に加飾フィルムを配置する際には、成型金型へ加飾成型フィルムを挿入した状態で、加飾成型フィルムと成型金型との位置合わせが必要になる。
Here, before placing the decorative molding film in the molding die, the decorative molding film is molded (preformed) using a molding die to form a decorative molding film. It is also possible to provide a three-dimensional shape in advance and supply it to a molding die.
In addition, when the decorative film is placed in the molding die, it is necessary to position the decorative molding film and the molding die while the decorative molding film is inserted into the molding die.
 成型金型へ加飾成型フィルムを挿入した状態で、加飾成型フィルムと成型金型との位置合わせを行う方法としては、雌型が有する位置合わせ穴へ、雄型が有する固定ピンを挿入して保持する方法がある。
 ここで、位置合わせ穴は、雌型において、加飾成型フィルムの端部(成型後に三次元形状が付与されない位置)予め形成されている。
With the decorative molding film inserted into the molding die, a method for aligning the decorative molding film and the molding die is to insert the fixing pin of the male die into the alignment hole of the female die. There is a way to hold.
Here, the positioning hole is formed in the female mold in advance at the end of the decorative molded film (the position where the three-dimensional shape is not given after molding).
 また、固定ピンは、雄型において、位置合わせ穴と嵌合する位置に、予め形成されている。
 また、成型金型へ加飾成型フィルムを挿入した状態で、加飾成型フィルムと成型金型との位置合わせを行う方法としては、位置合わせ穴へ固定ピンを挿入する方法以外にも、以下の方法を用いることが可能である。
Further, the fixing pin is formed in advance at a position where the fixing pin fits with the positioning hole in the male mold.
In addition, as a method of performing positioning between the decorative molding film and the molding die in a state where the decorative molding film is inserted into the molding die, in addition to the method of inserting the fixing pin into the positioning hole, the following method is also used. A method can be used.
 例えば、加飾成型フィルムのうち成型後に三次元形状が付与されない位置に予め付した位置合わせマークに目標として、加飾成型フィルムの搬送装置側の駆動により微調整して合わせ込む方法が挙げられる。この方法の場合、位置合わせマークは、射出成型品(加飾成型体)の製品部分から見て、対角2点以上で認識するのが好ましい。 For example, there is a method of finely adjusting and aligning the decorative molding film by driving the conveying device side of the decorative molding film as a target to a positioning mark previously attached to a position where a three-dimensional shape is not provided after molding in the decorative molding film. In this method, it is preferable that the alignment mark is recognized at two or more diagonal points when viewed from the product part of the injection molded product (decorative molded product).
 加飾成型フィルムと成型金型との位置合わせを行い、成型金型を型閉じした後に、加飾成型フィルムを挿入した成型金型内に溶融樹脂を射出する。射出時には、加飾成型フィルムの成型用基材側に溶融樹脂を射出する。 (4) Align the decorative molding film with the molding die, close the molding die, and then inject the molten resin into the molding die into which the decorative molding film is inserted. At the time of injection, molten resin is injected into the decorative molding film on the molding substrate side.
 成型金型内に射出される溶融樹脂の温度は、使用する樹脂の物性等に応じて設定する。例えば、使用する樹脂がアクリル樹脂であれば、溶融樹脂の温度は、240℃以上260℃以下の範囲内とすることが好ましい。 温度 The temperature of the molten resin injected into the molding die is set according to the physical properties of the resin used. For example, if the resin to be used is an acrylic resin, the temperature of the molten resin is preferably in the range from 240 ° C. to 260 ° C.
 なお、雄型が有する注入口(射出口)の位置を、溶融樹脂を成型金型内へ射出する際に発生する熱やガスにより、加飾成型フィルムが異常に変形することを抑制する目的で、成型金型の形状や溶融樹脂の種類に合わせて設定してもよい。
 加飾成型フィルムを挿入した成型金型内に射出した溶融樹脂が固化した後、成型金型を型開きして、成型金型から、固化した溶融樹脂である成型基材に加飾成型フィルムが固定化された中間加飾成型体を取り出す。
The position of the injection port (injection port) of the male mold is set to prevent the decorative molded film from being abnormally deformed by heat or gas generated when the molten resin is injected into the molding die. It may be set according to the shape of the molding die or the type of the molten resin.
After the molten resin injected into the molding die into which the decorative molding film is inserted is solidified, the molding die is opened, and the decorative molding film is transferred from the molding die to the molding base, which is the solidified molten resin. Take out the fixed intermediate decorative molded body.
 中間加飾成型体は、最終的に製品(加飾成型体)となる加飾部の周囲に、バリと、加飾成型体のダミー部分が一体化している。ここで、ダミー部分には、上述した位置合わせにおいて、固定ピンが挿通されて形成された挿通孔が存在している。
 このため、仕上げ加工前の中間加飾成型体における加飾部から、上記のバリとダミー部分を取り除く仕上げ加工を施すことにより、加飾成型体を得ることができる。
In the intermediate decorative molded body, a burr and a dummy portion of the decorative molded body are integrated around a decorative portion that finally becomes a product (decorative molded body). Here, the dummy portion has an insertion hole formed by inserting the fixing pin in the above-described alignment.
For this reason, the decorative molded body can be obtained by performing the finishing process of removing the burrs and the dummy portions from the decorative portion of the intermediate decorative molded body before the finishing processing.
 上記のようにして得られた加飾成型体を露光して、加飾フィルム中の着色層の硬化度を高めてもよい。
 この露光を行うことで、着色層と透明フィルムとの間及び着色層と加飾成型体との間の密着性が更に高まり、熱等に対する耐久性が更に向上する。
The decorative molded article obtained as described above may be exposed to increase the degree of curing of the colored layer in the decorative film.
By performing this exposure, the adhesion between the colored layer and the transparent film and between the colored layer and the decorative molded body is further increased, and the durability against heat and the like is further improved.
 本開示に係る加飾フィルム及び加飾成型フィルムは、立体成型も好適に挙げられる。
 立体成型は、熱成型、真空成型、圧空成型、真空圧空成型などが好適に挙げられる。
 真空成型する方法としては、特に制限されるものではないが、立体成型を、真空下の加熱した状態で行う方法が好ましい。
 真空とは、室内を真空引きし、100Pa以下の真空度とした状態を指す。
 立体成型する際の温度は、用いる成型用基材に応じ適宜設定すればよいが、60℃以上の温度域が好ましく、80℃以上の温度域がより好ましく、100℃以上の温度域が更に好ましい。立体成型する際の温度の上限は、200℃が好ましい。
 立体成型する際の温度とは、立体成型に供される成型用基材の温度を指し、成型用基材の表面に熱電対を付すことで測定される。
The decorative film and the decorative molded film according to the present disclosure also preferably include three-dimensional molding.
As the three-dimensional molding, heat molding, vacuum molding, air pressure molding, vacuum pressure molding, and the like are preferably exemplified.
The method of vacuum molding is not particularly limited, but a method of performing three-dimensional molding in a heated state under vacuum is preferable.
The vacuum means a state in which the interior of the room is evacuated to a degree of vacuum of 100 Pa or less.
The temperature during the three-dimensional molding may be appropriately set according to the molding substrate to be used, but is preferably a temperature range of 60 ° C. or higher, more preferably a temperature range of 80 ° C. or higher, and further preferably a temperature range of 100 ° C. or higher. . The upper limit of the temperature during three-dimensional molding is preferably 200 ° C.
The temperature at the time of performing three-dimensional molding refers to the temperature of the molding substrate used for three-dimensional molding, and is measured by attaching a thermocouple to the surface of the molding substrate.
 上記の真空成型は、成型分野で広く知られている真空成型技術を利用して行うことができ、例えば、日本製図器工業(株)製のFormech508FSを用いて真空成型してもよい。 真空 The above-mentioned vacuum molding can be performed using a vacuum molding technique widely known in the molding field. For example, vacuum molding may be performed using Formech 508FS manufactured by Nippon Zokeki Kogyo Co., Ltd.
 上記のようにして得られた加飾成型体の用途としては、特に制限はなく、種々の物品に用いることができるが、自動車の内外装、電気製品の内外装、包装容器等が特に好適に挙げられる。 The application of the decorative molded body obtained as described above is not particularly limited and can be used for various articles, but the interior and exterior of automobiles, the interior and exterior of electric products, packaging containers and the like are particularly preferable. No.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本開示を更に具体的に説明する。本開示の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」及び「%」は質量基準である。 本 Hereinafter, the present disclosure will be described more specifically with reference to examples. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the specific examples described below. Unless otherwise specified, “parts” and “%” are based on mass.
<加飾フィルム形成用の各組成物の調製>
〔着色層形成用組成物の調製〕
 下記の組成を有する着色層形成用組成物1を調製した。
 黒色顔料分散液:302.9質量部
 バインダー樹脂:253.9質量部
 重合性化合物:74.4質量部
 重合開始剤:0.9質量部
 界面活性剤:0.4質量部
 有機溶剤:367.5質量部
<Preparation of each composition for decorative film formation>
(Preparation of colored layer forming composition)
A colored layer forming composition 1 having the following composition was prepared.
Black pigment dispersion: 302.9 parts by mass Binder resin: 253.9 parts by mass Polymerizable compound: 74.4 parts by mass Polymerization initiator: 0.9 parts by mass Surfactant: 0.4 parts by mass Organic solvent: 367. 5 parts by mass
 上記各化合物の詳細を、以下に示す。
・バインダー樹脂:ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸(モル比70/30)の共重合体(重量平均分子量Mw:29,000)の40質量%1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテート溶液
・重合性化合物:サートマー・ジャパン(株)製、ウレタンアクリレートオリゴマー、CN-996NS(固形分:100質量%)
・重合開始剤:BASF社製、OXE-02(1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]エタノン-1-(O-アセチルオキシム))
・界面活性剤:DIC(株)製、メガファック(登録商標)F-551、パーフルオロアルキル基含有リン酸エステル型アミン中和物のメチルイソブチルケトン溶液(固形分:30質量%)
・有機溶剤:メチルエチルケトン
Details of each of the above compounds are shown below.
Binder resin: 40 mass% 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate solution of benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid (molar ratio 70/30) copolymer (weight average molecular weight Mw: 29,000) Polymerizable compound: Sartomer Japan Co., Ltd., urethane acrylate oligomer, CN-996NS (solid content: 100% by mass)
Polymerization initiator: OXE-02 (1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazol-3-yl] ethanone-1- (O-acetyloxime) manufactured by BASF)
Surfactant: Megafac (registered trademark) F-551, manufactured by DIC Corporation, a solution of a phosphate-type amine-neutralized product containing a perfluoroalkyl group in methyl isobutyl ketone (solid content: 30% by mass)
・ Organic solvent: methyl ethyl ketone
〔黒色顔料分散液の調製〕
 以下の黒色顔料分散液の組成となるようにカーボンブラック、分散剤、ポリマー及び溶剤を混合し、3本ロールとビーズミルを用いて黒色顔料分散液を得た。なお、マイクロトラックFRA(ハネウェル社)を用いて測定した平均粒子径(メジアン径)は、163nmであった。
(Preparation of black pigment dispersion)
Carbon black, a dispersant, a polymer, and a solvent were mixed so as to have the following composition of a black pigment dispersion, and a black pigment dispersion was obtained using a three-roll mill and a bead mill. The average particle size (median size) measured using Microtrack FRA (Honeywell) was 163 nm.
-黒色顔料分散液の組成-
・特許第5320652号公報の段落0036~0042の記載に従って作製した樹脂被覆カーボンブラック:20.0質量%
・分散剤1(下記構造):1.0質量%
・ポリマー(ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸=72/28モル比のランダム共重合体物、重量平均分子量3.0万):6.0質量%
・プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート:73.0質量%
-Composition of black pigment dispersion-
-Resin-coated carbon black produced according to the description of paragraphs 0036 to 0042 of Japanese Patent No. 5320652: 20.0% by mass
Dispersant 1 (the following structure): 1.0% by mass
-Polymer (benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid = 72/28 molar ratio random copolymer, weight average molecular weight 300000): 6.0% by mass
-Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate: 73.0% by mass
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
<加飾フィルムの作製>
〔仮支持体の準備〕
 仮支持体として、剥離層付きPETフィルム(ユニピールTR-6,厚さ75μm、ユニチカ(株)製)を準備した。
<Preparation of decorative film>
(Preparation of temporary support)
As a temporary support, a PET film with a release layer (Unipeel TR-6, thickness 75 μm, manufactured by Unitika Ltd.) was prepared.
〔着色層の形成(着色層を形成する工程)〕
 エクストルージョンコーターを使用し、仮支持体の剥離層塗布面上に、着色層形成用組成物1を、乾燥後の厚さが8μmとなるように塗布して、着色層形成用組成物層を形成し、これを110℃2分乾燥させて着色層を形成した。その後、カバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(厚さ35μm、タマポリ(株)製GF-8)を接着させた。
 その後、形成された着色層及び仮支持体の積層体の両面から、露光量500mJ/cm(i線)で全面露光した。
[Formation of Colored Layer (Step of Forming Colored Layer)]
Using an extrusion coater, the composition 1 for forming a colored layer is applied on the surface of the temporary support on which the release layer is to be applied so that the thickness after drying is 8 μm. This was dried at 110 ° C. for 2 minutes to form a colored layer. Thereafter, a polyethylene film (35 μm thick, GF-8 manufactured by Tamapoly Corporation) was adhered as a cover film.
Thereafter, the entire surface was exposed at an exposure amount of 500 mJ / cm 2 (i-line) from both sides of the laminated body of the formed colored layer and the temporary support.
〔透明フィルムの準備〕
 透明フィルムとして、テクノロイS001G(厚さ100μmのアクリル樹脂フィルム、住化アクリル販売(株)製)を準備した。
[Preparation of transparent film]
As a transparent film, Technoroy S001G (100 μm thick acrylic resin film, manufactured by Sumika Acrylic Sales Co., Ltd.) was prepared.
<樹脂層及び色変化層Aの作製>
〔透明フィルム(樹脂層)の面上への色変化層Aの形成〕
 後述する色変化層A形成用組成物を用い、上記透明フィルムの上に、表1に記載の屈折率及び厚みを有する色変化層Aを形成した。
 具体的には、透明フィルムの上に、エクストルージョンコーターを使用し、透明フィルムの一方の面に、色変化層A形成用組成物である塗布液を、表1に記載の厚み(乾燥後の厚み)となる量で塗布して、これを80℃2分乾燥させることにより色変化層Aを形成した。その後、形成された色変化層A側から、露光量300mJ/cm(i線)で全面露光した。
<Preparation of resin layer and color change layer A>
[Formation of color change layer A on the surface of a transparent film (resin layer)]
A color-changing layer A having a refractive index and a thickness shown in Table 1 was formed on the transparent film using a composition for forming a color-changing layer A described later.
Specifically, using an extrusion coater on a transparent film, a coating solution as a composition for forming a color-changing layer A was coated on one surface of the transparent film with a thickness shown in Table 1 (after drying). (Color thickness) was formed, and dried at 80 ° C. for 2 minutes to form a color change layer A. Thereafter, the entire surface was exposed from the side of the formed color changing layer A at an exposure amount of 300 mJ / cm 2 (i-line).
〔色変化層Bの形成〕
 次いで、上記色変化層A上に表1に記載の屈折率及び厚みを有する色変化層Bを形成した。
 具体的には、エクストルージョンコーターを使用し、色変化層A上に色変化層B形成用組成物である塗布液を、表1に記載の厚み(乾燥後の厚み)となる量で塗布して、これを80℃2分乾燥させることにより色変化層Bを形成した。その後、形成された色変化層B側から、露光量300mJ/cm(i線)で全面露光した。ただし、実施例3については、露光していない。
[Formation of color change layer B]
Next, a color change layer B having a refractive index and a thickness shown in Table 1 was formed on the color change layer A.
Specifically, using an extrusion coater, a coating solution, which is a composition for forming a color-changing layer B, is applied on the color-changing layer A in an amount of the thickness (thickness after drying) shown in Table 1. This was dried at 80 ° C. for 2 minutes to form a color change layer B. Thereafter, the entire surface was exposed from the formed color changing layer B side at an exposure amount of 300 mJ / cm 2 (i-line). However, Example 3 was not exposed.
〔着色層と透明フィルム(樹脂層)とのラミネート〕
 着色層からカバーフィルムを剥離した後に、透明フィルムの非塗布面が着色層に接するようにラミネートした。
 ラミネート条件は、ロール温度:90℃、線圧100N/cm、搬送速度0.1m/分で行った。
[Lamination of colored layer and transparent film (resin layer)]
After peeling off the cover film from the coloring layer, lamination was performed so that the non-coated surface of the transparent film was in contact with the coloring layer.
Laminating conditions were as follows: roll temperature: 90 ° C., linear pressure: 100 N / cm, conveyance speed: 0.1 m / min.
〔粘着層の作製〕
 露光後の積層体から仮支持体を剥離した後、両面に保護フィルムを有する粘着シート(G25、日栄化工(株)製)の片面の保護フィルムを剥離した後、仮支持体を剥離した面に粘着シートをラミネートした(温度:30℃、線圧100N/cm、搬送速度0.1m/分)。片面の保護フィルムは剥離しなかった。
 これにより、保護フィルム、粘着層、着色層、樹脂層、色変化層A及び色変化層Bからなる実施例1~実施例18の加飾フィルムが形成された。
(Preparation of adhesive layer)
After peeling off the temporary support from the laminated body after exposure, after peeling off one side of the protective film of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (G25, manufactured by Niei Kako Co., Ltd.) having protective films on both sides, the temporary support is peeled off. An adhesive sheet was laminated (temperature: 30 ° C., linear pressure: 100 N / cm, conveyance speed: 0.1 m / min). The protective film on one side was not peeled off.
Thus, the decorative films of Examples 1 to 18 each including the protective film, the adhesive layer, the coloring layer, the resin layer, the color changing layer A, and the color changing layer B were formed.
 以下に各実施例比較例で使用した色変化層A形成用組成物、及び、色変化層B形成用組成物の詳細を示す。
 以下の実施例において、以下の略語はそれぞれ以下の化合物を表す。
 エトキシ化O-フェニルフェノールアクリレート:新中村化学工業(株)製
 SZR-M:酸化ジルコニウム分散液、堺化学工業(株)製SZR-M、30質量%メタノール溶液、メジアン径:3nm
 SZR-CW:酸化ジルコニウム分散液、堺化学工業(株)製SZR-CW、30質量%水溶液、メジアン径:6nm
 HTD-780T:酸化チタン粒子、テイカ(株)製HTD-780T
 Irgacure2959(1%メタノール希釈):重合開始剤、1-[4-(2-ヒドロキシエトキシ)フェニル]-2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチルプロパン-1-オン、BASF社製、1質量%メタノール希釈液
 Irgacure2959(粉体):重合開始剤、1-[4-(2-ヒドロキシエトキシ)フェニル]-2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチルプロパン-1-オン、BASF社製、粉体
 F-444(1%メタノール希釈):フッ素系界面活性剤、DIC(株)製、1質量%メタノール希釈液
 F-444(原液):フッ素系界面活性剤、DIC(株)製、原液
 F-444(1%蒸留水希釈):フッ素系界面活性剤、DIC(株)製、1質量%蒸留水希釈液
 PET-30:多官能アクリルモノマー、日本化薬(株)製PET-30、ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレートとペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレートとの混合物
 エポクロスWS-700:(株)日本触媒製 エポクロスWS-700、オキサゾリン基含有ポリマー
 プラスコートZ687:互応化学工業(株)製 ポリエステル樹脂
 ハイドランHW-350:DIC(株)製 ポリウレタン樹脂
 M-510:多官能アクリルオリゴマー、東亞合成(株)製M-510、多塩基酸変性アクリルオリゴマー
 M-1200:東亞合成(株)製M-1200、2官能ウレタンアクリレート
 M-270:東亞合成(株)製M-270、2官能ウレタンアクリレート
 スルーリア4110:中空シリカ粒子、日揮触媒化成(株)製スルーリア4110、平均粒子径60nm
 MEK:メチルエチルケトン(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
The details of the composition for forming the color-change layer A and the composition for forming the color-change layer B used in the comparative examples are shown below.
In the following examples, the following abbreviations represent the following compounds, respectively.
Ethoxylated O-phenylphenol acrylate: Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd. SZR-M: Zirconium oxide dispersion, Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., SZR-M, 30% by mass methanol solution, median diameter: 3 nm
SZR-CW: zirconium oxide dispersion, SZR-CW manufactured by Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., 30% by mass aqueous solution, median diameter: 6 nm
HTD-780T: titanium oxide particles, HTD-780T manufactured by Teica Corporation
Irgacure 2959 (1% methanol dilution): polymerization initiator, 1- [4- (2-hydroxyethoxy) phenyl] -2-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-1-one, manufactured by BASF, 1% by mass methanol dilution Irgacure 2959 (Powder): polymerization initiator, 1- [4- (2-hydroxyethoxy) phenyl] -2-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-1-one, manufactured by BASF, powder F-444 (1% methanol dilution) ): Fluorosurfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation, 1% by mass methanol diluted solution F-444 (stock solution): Fluorosurfactant, manufactured by DIC Co., stock solution F-444 (1% diluted with distilled water) : Fluorinated surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation, 1% by mass diluted with distilled water PET-30: polyfunctional acrylic monomer, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. PET-30, pen Mixture of erythritol triacrylate and pentaerythritol tetraacrylate Epocros WS-700: manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd. Epocross WS-700, an oxazoline group-containing polymer Pluscoat Z687: polyester resin Hydran HW-350: manufactured by Ryogo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Polyurethane resin M-510: polyfunctional acrylic oligomer manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. M-510: polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomer M-1200: Toagosei Co., Ltd. M-1200: bifunctional urethane acrylate M -270: M-270, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., bifunctional urethane acrylate, sluria 4110: hollow silica particles, sluria 4110, manufactured by Nikki Shokubai Kasei Co., Ltd., average particle diameter 60 nm
MEK: methyl ethyl ketone (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
(実施例1)
〔色変化層A形成用組成物の組成〕
・エトキシ化O-フェニルフェノールアクリレート:3.65質量部
・SZR-M:18.41質量部
・Irgacure2959(1%メタノール希釈):3.65質量部
・F-444(1%メタノール希釈):2.72質量部
・メタノール:71.56質量部
(Example 1)
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer A]
Ethoxylated O-phenylphenol acrylate: 3.65 parts by mass SZR-M: 18.41 parts by mass Irgacure 2959 (1% methanol dilution): 3.65 parts by mass F-444 (1% methanol dilution): 2 0.72 parts by mass. Methanol: 71.56 parts by mass.
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の組成〕
・多官能アクリルモノマー PET-30:67.28質量部
・MEK:29.92質量部
・F-444(1%メタノール希釈):2.80質量部
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer B]
・ Polyfunctional acrylic monomer PET-30: 67.28 parts by mass ・ MEK: 29.92 parts by mass ・ F-444 (1% methanol dilution): 2.80 parts by mass
(実施例2)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例1と同じものを使用した。
(Example 2)
The same composition as in Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer A.
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の組成〕
・多官能アクリルオリゴマー(M-510):6.26質量部
・中空シリカ粒子(スルーリア4110):93.06質量部
・Irgacure2959(粉体):0.66質量部
・F-444(原液):0.02質量部
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer B]
-Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 6.26 parts by mass-Hollow silica particles (Thrulia 4110): 93.06 parts by mass-Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.66 parts by mass-F-444 (stock solution): 0.02 parts by mass
(実施例3)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例1の色変化層B形成用組成物と同じものを使用した。
(Example 3)
As the composition for forming the color-change layer A, the same composition as the composition for forming the color-change layer B of Example 1 was used.
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の調製〕
-エマルジョン粒子分散液1の組成-
・ヘキサデカン(n-ヘキサデカン、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製):2.77部
・Ca-1(ヘキサデシルピリジニウムクロリド10%蒸留水希釈、カチオン界面活性剤、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製):4.42部
・蒸留水:42.81部
 エマルジョン粒子分散液1の調製は、詳細には、以下の手順で行った。
 ヘキサデカン、Ca-1及びイオン交換水を混合し、日本エマソン(株)製超音波ホモジナイザーSonifier450を用いて、氷水で冷やし、かつ撹拌しながら30分間処理することにより、水中にヘキサデカンのエマルションが存在する分散液を得た。
[Preparation of composition for forming color-change layer B]
-Composition of emulsion particle dispersion 1-
Hexadecane (n-hexadecane, manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.): 2.77 partsCa-1 (hexadecylpyridinium chloride 10% diluted in distilled water, cationic surfactant, Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) Preparation: 4.42 parts / Distilled water: 42.81 parts The emulsion particle dispersion 1 was prepared in detail by the following procedure.
Hexadecane, Ca-1, and ion-exchanged water are mixed, and cooled with ice water using an ultrasonic homogenizer Sonifier 450 manufactured by Nippon Emerson Co., Ltd., and treated with stirring for 30 minutes, whereby an emulsion of hexadecane is present in water. A dispersion was obtained.
-コアシェル粒子分散液1の組成-
・エマルジョン粒子分散液1:35.94部
・蒸留水:2.84部
・酢酸(5%蒸留水希釈):1.26部
・MS-51(式1で表される化合物、三菱ケミカル(株)製)9.96部
 なお、MS-51は、上記式1におけるR、R及びRがメチル基であり、mが2であり、nが平均5である化合物である。
-Composition of core-shell particle dispersion 1-
-Emulsion particle dispersion 1: 35.94 parts-Distilled water: 2.84 parts-Acetic acid (diluted in 5% distilled water): 1.26 parts-MS-51 (compound represented by formula 1, Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) 9.96 parts) MS-51 is a compound in which R 1 , R 2 and R 3 in the above formula 1 are methyl groups, m is 2, and n is 5 on average.
 次いで、エマルジョン粒子分散液1に、MS-51、酢酸、蒸留水を添加し、添加後更に25℃で16時間撹拌することにより、非極性溶剤をコア材として含むコアシェル粒子、式1で表される化合物、界面活性剤及び水を含むコアシェル粒子分散液1を得た。 Next, MS-51, acetic acid, and distilled water are added to the emulsion particle dispersion 1, and the mixture is further stirred at 25 ° C. for 16 hours to obtain core-shell particles containing a nonpolar solvent as a core material, represented by Formula 1. And a core-shell particle dispersion 1 containing a compound, a surfactant and water.
-色変化層B形成用組成物の組成-
・コアシェル粒子分散液1:15.04部
・イオン交換水:79.46部
・F-444(1%蒸留水希釈):5.50部
-Composition of composition for forming color change layer B-
・ Core-shell particle dispersion 1: 15.04 parts ・ Ion-exchanged water: 79.46 parts ・ F-444 (diluted with 1% distilled water): 5.50 parts
 次いで、コアシェル粒子分散液1にイオン交換水、F-444を添加し、25℃で2日間撹拌することにより、実施例3の色変化層B形成用組成物を得た。 Next, ion-exchanged water and F-444 were added to the core-shell particle dispersion 1, and the mixture was stirred at 25 ° C. for 2 days to obtain a composition for forming a color-change layer B of Example 3.
(実施例4)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例1の色変化層B形成用組成物と同じものを使用した。
(Example 4)
As the composition for forming the color-change layer A, the same composition as the composition for forming the color-change layer B of Example 1 was used.
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の組成〕
・多官能アクリルオリゴマー(M-510):0.60質量部
・中空シリカ粒子(スルーリア4110):8.95質量部
・Irgacure2959(粉体):0.06質量部
・F-444(1%メタノール希釈):4.87質量部
・メタノール:85.51質量部
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer B]
-Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 0.60 parts by mass-Hollow silica particles (Thrulia 4110): 8.95 parts by mass-Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.06 parts by mass-F-444 (1% methanol) (Dilution): 4.87 parts by mass. Methanol: 85.51 parts by mass.
(実施例5~7)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例1の色変化層B形成用組成物と同じものを使用した。
 色変化層B形成用組成物は、実施例4と同じものを使用した。
(Examples 5 to 7)
As the composition for forming the color-change layer A, the same composition as the composition for forming the color-change layer B of Example 1 was used.
The same composition as that of Example 4 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer B.
(実施例8~10)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例1と同じものを使用した。
 色変化層B形成用組成物は、実施例2と同じものを使用した。
(Examples 8 to 10)
The same composition as in Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer A.
The same composition as that used in Example 2 was used as the composition for forming the color change layer B.
(実施例11)
〔色変化層A形成用組成物の組成〕
・エトキシ化O-フェニルフェノールアクリレート:5.90質量部
・酸化ジルコニウム分散液(SZR-M):10.83質量部
・Irgacure2959(1%メタノール希釈):5.90質量部
・F-444(1%メタノール希釈):4.54質量部
・メタノール:72.83質量部
(Example 11)
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer A]
Ethoxylated O-phenylphenol acrylate: 5.90 parts by mass Zirconium oxide dispersion (SZR-M): 10.83 parts by mass Irgacure 2959 (1% methanol dilution): 5.90 parts by mass F-444 (1 % Methanol dilution): 4.54 parts by mass. Methanol: 72.83 parts by mass.
 色変化層B形成用組成物は、実施例2と同じものを使用した。 The same composition as in Example 2 was used as the composition for forming the color change layer B.
(実施例12)
〔色変化層A形成用組成物の組成〕
・エトキシ化O-フェニルフェノールアクリレート:7.74質量部
・酸化ジルコニウム分散液(SZR-M):4.64質量部
・Irgacure2959(1%メタノール希釈):7.74質量部
・F-444(1%メタノール希釈):4.54質量部
・メタノール:75.34質量部
(Example 12)
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer A]
Ethoxylated O-phenylphenol acrylate: 7.74 parts by mass Zirconium oxide dispersion (SZR-M): 4.64 parts by mass Irgacure 2959 (diluted with 1% methanol): 7.74 parts by mass F-444 (1 % Methanol dilution): 4.54 parts by mass. Methanol: 75.34 parts by mass.
 色変化層B形成用組成物は、実施例2と同じものを使用した。 The same composition as in Example 2 was used as the composition for forming the color change layer B.
(実施例13)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例12と同じものを使用した。
 色変化層B形成用組成物は、実施例1と同じものを使用した。
(Example 13)
The same composition as that of Example 12 was used as the composition for forming the color change layer A.
The same composition as in Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer B.
(実施例14)
〔色変化層A形成用組成物の組成〕
・エトキシ化O-フェニルフェノールアクリレート:8.20質量部
・酸化チタン粒子(HTD-780T):3.09質量部
・Irgacure2959(1%メタノール希釈):8.20質量部
・F-444(1%メタノール希釈):4.54質量部
・メタノール:75.97質量部
(Example 14)
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer A]
Ethoxy O-phenylphenol acrylate: 8.20 parts by mass Titanium oxide particles (HTD-780T): 3.09 parts by mass Irgacure 2959 (1% methanol dilution): 8.20 parts by mass F-444 (1% (Methanol dilution): 4.54 parts by mass. Methanol: 75.97 parts by mass.
 色変化層B形成用組成物は、実施例4と同じものを使用した。 The same composition as that of Example 4 was used for the composition for forming the color change layer B.
(実施例15)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例1と同じものを使用した。
(Example 15)
The same composition as in Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer A.
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の組成〕
・多官能アクリルオリゴマー(M-510):10.37質量部
・中空シリカ粒子(スルーリア4110):70.28質量部
・Irgacure2959(粉体):1.09質量部
・F-444(原液):0.04質量部
・メタノール:18.22質量部
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer B]
・ Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 10.37 parts by mass ・ Hollow silica particles (Thrulia 4110): 70.28 parts by mass ・ Irgacure 2959 (powder): 1.09 parts by mass ・ F-444 (stock solution): 0.04 parts by mass / methanol: 18.22 parts by mass
(実施例16)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例1と同じものを使用した。
(Example 16)
The same composition as in Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer A.
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の組成〕
・多官能アクリルオリゴマー(M-510):14.63質量部
・中空シリカ粒子(スルーリア4110):46.74質量部
・Irgacure2959(粉体):1.54質量部
・F-444(原液):0.04質量部
・メタノール:37.05質量部
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer B]
・ Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 14.63 parts by mass ・ Hollow silica particles (Suria 4110): 46.74 parts by mass ・ Irgacure 2959 (powder): 1.54 parts by mass ・ F-444 (stock solution): 0.04 parts by mass / methanol: 37.05 parts by mass
(実施例17)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例3と同じものを使用した。
(Example 17)
The same composition as in Example 3 was used as the composition for forming the color-change layer A.
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の組成〕
・多官能アクリルオリゴマー(M-510):2.79質量部
・中空シリカ粒子(スルーリア4110):8.91質量部
・Irgacure2959(粉体):0.29質量部
・F-444(原液):0.05質量部
・メタノール:87.96質量部
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer B]
-Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 2.79 parts by mass-Hollow silica particles (Suria 4110): 8.91 parts by mass-Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.29 parts by mass-F-444 (stock solution): 0.05 parts by mass / methanol: 87.96 parts by mass
(実施例18)
〔色変化層A形成用組成物の組成〕
・ウレタンアクリレートモノマー(M-1200):67.14質量部
・MEK:29.86質量部
・Irgacure2959(粉体):0.20質量部
・F-444(1%メタノール希釈):2.78質量部
(Example 18)
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer A]
-Urethane acrylate monomer (M-1200): 67.14 parts by mass-MEK: 29.86 parts by mass-Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.20 parts by mass-F-444 (1% methanol dilution): 2.78 parts by mass Department
 色変化層B形成用組成物は、実施例4と同じものを使用した。 The same composition as that of Example 4 was used for the composition for forming the color change layer B.
(実施例19)
 実施例1において、残った粘着シートの保護フィルムを剥離した後、アクリロニトリル-ブタジエン-スチレン共重合体(ABS)フィルム(ABSバッカーともいう。)をラミネート(厚さ250μm、オカモト(株)製、ラミネート温度:30℃、線圧100N/cm、搬送速度0.1m/分)することにより、ABS、粘着層、着色層、透明フィルム、樹脂層が順に並んだ、実施例19の加飾成型フィルムを作製した。 
(Example 19)
In Example 1, after the protective film of the remaining pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was peeled off, an acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer (ABS) film (also referred to as ABS backer) was laminated (250 μm thick, manufactured by Okamoto Corporation). Temperature: 30 ° C., linear pressure: 100 N / cm, conveyance speed: 0.1 m / min) to give the decorative molded film of Example 19 in which the ABS, the adhesive layer, the colored layer, the transparent film, and the resin layer were arranged in this order. Produced.
(実施例20)
〔色変化層A形成用組成物の組成〕
・ポリエステル樹脂(プラスコートZ687):146.24質量部
・酸化ジルコニウム分散液(SZR-CW):185.19質量部
・フッ素系界面活性剤(ナトリウム=ビス(3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,6-ノナフルオロヘキシル)=2-スルホナイトオキシスクシナート、富士フイルムファインケミカルズ(株)製、1%水希釈):27.23質量部
・イオン交換水:257.09質量部
・エタノール(95):384.25質量部
(Example 20)
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer A]
Polyester resin (Plus Coat Z687): 146.24 parts by massZirconium oxide dispersion (SZR-CW): 185.19 parts by massFluorine surfactant (sodium bis (3,3,4,4,5) , 5,6,6,6-Nonafluorohexyl) = 2-sulfonite oxysuccinate, manufactured by FUJIFILM Fine Chemicals Co., Ltd., diluted with 1% water): 27.23 parts by mass, ion-exchanged water: 257.09 Parts by mass / ethanol (95): 384.25 parts by mass
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の組成〕
・アクリレートモノマー(M-270):555.12質量部
・MEK:444.10質量部
・Irgacure2959(粉体):0.56質量部
・F-444(1%メタノール希釈):0.22質量部
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer B]
Acrylate monomer (M-270): 555.12 parts by mass MEK: 444.10 parts by mass Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.56 parts by mass F-444 (1% methanol dilution): 0.22 parts by mass
(実施例21)
〔色変化層A形成用組成物の組成〕
・ポリウレタン樹脂(ハイドランHW-350):121.86質量部
・酸化ジルコニウム分散液(SZR-CW):185.19質量部
・フッ素系界面活性剤(ナトリウム=ビス(3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,6-ノナフルオロヘキシル)=2-スルホナイトオキシスクシナート、富士フイルムファインケミカルズ(株)製、1%水希釈):27.23質量部
・イオン交換水:281.47質量部
・エタノール(95):384.25質量部
(Example 21)
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer A]
-Polyurethane resin (Hydran HW-350): 121.86 parts by mass-Zirconium oxide dispersion (SZR-CW): 185.19 parts by mass-Fluorinated surfactant (sodium bis (3,3,4,4,4) 5,5,6,6,6-nonafluorohexyl) = 2-sulfonite oxysuccinate, manufactured by FUJIFILM Fine Chemicals Co., Ltd., diluted with 1% water): 27.23 parts by mass, ion-exchanged water: 281. 47 parts by mass / ethanol (95): 384.25 parts by mass
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の組成〕
 色変化層B形成用組成物は、実施例20と同じものを使用した。
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer B]
The same composition as in Example 20 was used as the composition for forming a color-change layer B.
(実施例22)
〔色変化層A形成用組成物の組成〕
・アクリル樹脂(エポクロスWS-700):109.76質量部
・酸化ジルコニウム分散液(SZR-CW):215.58質量部
・フッ素系界面活性剤(ナトリウム=ビス(3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,6-ノナフルオロヘキシル)=2-スルホナイトオキシスクシナート、富士フイルムファインケミカルズ(株)製、1%水希釈):27.23質量部
・イオン交換水:263.17質量部
・エタノール(95):384.25質量部
(Example 22)
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer A]
Acrylic resin (Epocross WS-700): 109.76 parts by mass Zirconium oxide dispersion (SZR-CW): 215.58 parts by mass Fluorinated surfactant (sodium = bis (3,3,4,4,4) 5,5,6,6,6-nonafluorohexyl) = 2-sulfonite oxysuccinate, manufactured by FUJIFILM Fine Chemicals Co., Ltd., diluted with 1% water): 27.23 parts by mass, ion-exchanged water: 263. 17 parts by mass / ethanol (95): 384.25 parts by mass
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の組成〕
 色変化層B形成用組成物は、実施例20と同じものを使用した。
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer B]
The same composition as in Example 20 was used as the composition for forming a color-change layer B.
(比較例1)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例1の色変化層B形成用組成物と同じものを使用した。
(Comparative Example 1)
As the composition for forming the color-change layer A, the same composition as the composition for forming the color-change layer B of Example 1 was used.
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の組成〕
・多官能アクリルオリゴマー(M-510):3.46質量部
・中空シリカ粒子(スルーリア4110):5.46質量部
・Irgacure2959(粉体):0.36質量部
・F-444(1%メタノール希釈):4.75質量部
・メタノール:85.97質量部
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer B]
・ Polyfunctional acrylic oligomer (M-510): 3.46 parts by mass ・ Hollow silica particles (Thrulia 4110): 5.46 parts by mass ・ Irgacure 2959 (powder): 0.36 parts by mass ・ F-444 (1% methanol) (Dilution): 4.75 parts by mass. Methanol: 85.97 parts by mass.
(比較例2)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例1の色変化層B形成用組成物と同じものを使用した。
 また、色変化層Bは、形成しなかった。
(Comparative Example 2)
As the composition for forming the color-change layer A, the same composition as the composition for forming the color-change layer B of Example 1 was used.
Further, the color change layer B was not formed.
(比較例3)
 色変化層A形成用組成物は、実施例1の色変化層B形成用組成物と同じものを使用した。
(Comparative Example 3)
As the composition for forming the color-change layer A, the same composition as the composition for forming the color-change layer B of Example 1 was used.
〔色変化層B形成用組成物の組成〕
・多官能アクリルモノマー(PET-30):4.91質量部
・MEK:90.34質量部
・F-444(1%メタノール希釈):4.75質量部
[Composition of composition for forming color change layer B]
・ Polyfunctional acrylic monomer (PET-30): 4.91 parts by mass ・ MEK: 90.34 parts by mass ・ F-444 (1% methanol dilution): 4.75 parts by mass
(比較例4)
 色変化層B形成用組成物は、比較例1と同じものを使用した。
 また、色変化層Aは、形成しなかった。
(Comparative Example 4)
The same composition as that of Comparative Example 1 was used as the composition for forming the color change layer B.
Further, the color change layer A was not formed.
 各実施例比較例において得られた加飾フィルムを使用し、以下の評価を行った。評価結果をまとめて表1に示す。 Each Example The following evaluation was performed using the decorative film obtained in the comparative example. Table 1 summarizes the evaluation results.
〔立体成型性の評価〕
 自動車のエンブレムを想定し、直径10cm、高さ3mmの円柱状のステンレス製部材に対し、延伸時のひび割れ等発生しないか立体成型性の評価を行った。試験に先立ち、ABSをラミネートした実施例19は、得られたフィルムをそのまま用い、それ以外の実施例及び比較例については、粘着シートの保護シートを剥離後、ABSフィルムをラミネート(厚さ250μm、オカモト(株)をラミネート温度:30℃、線圧100N/cm、搬送速度0.1m/分)した後に試験を行った。
 円柱状部材を用いて、得られた加飾フィルムを、加熱温度を120℃にて、真空成型し、表面に割れが発生したか否かを目視にて評価した。
  A:表面に割れが発生しなかった
  B:表面に割れが発生した
[Evaluation of three-dimensional moldability]
Assuming an automobile emblem, three-dimensional moldability of a cylindrical stainless steel member having a diameter of 10 cm and a height of 3 mm was evaluated for occurrence of cracks or the like during stretching. In Example 19 in which ABS was laminated before the test, the obtained film was used as it was, and in the other Examples and Comparative Examples, after the protective sheet of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was peeled off, the ABS film was laminated (thickness 250 μm, The test was carried out after laminating Okamoto Co., Ltd. at a laminating temperature of 30 ° C., a linear pressure of 100 N / cm, and a conveying speed of 0.1 m / min.
Using a columnar member, the obtained decorative film was vacuum molded at a heating temperature of 120 ° C., and whether or not cracks occurred on the surface was visually evaluated.
A: No crack occurred on the surface B: Crack occurred on the surface
〔意匠性(色変化性)の評価〕
 得られた加飾フィルムを、日本分光(株)製紫外可視赤外分光光度計V-560、及び、絶対反射率測定装置ARV-474を用いて、正反射率を測定することにより意匠性を評価した。
 意匠性評価には、得られた加飾フィルムの可視光(波長380nm~780nm)における反射率の最高値Rmaxを波長700nmにおける反射率R700nmで除算した値Rdesを用いた。Rdesが大きいほど、色変化性に優れることを意味する。
 評価基準は、Rdesの値に応じ、以下の通りである。A~Cであることが好ましい。
  A:2%以上
  B:1.5%以上2%未満
  C:1%以上1.5%未満
  D:0.5%以上1%未満
  E:0.5%未満
[Evaluation of design (color change)]
The decorative film obtained was measured for specular reflectance using an ultraviolet-visible infrared spectrophotometer V-560 (manufactured by JASCO Corporation) and an absolute reflectance measuring device ARV-474 to improve the design. evaluated.
For the evaluation of the design properties, a value R des obtained by dividing the maximum value R max of the reflectance of the obtained decorative film in visible light (wavelength 380 nm to 780 nm) by the reflectance R 700 nm in the wavelength of 700 nm was used. The larger the R des, the better the color change.
The evaluation criteria are as follows according to the value of R des . A to C are preferred.
A: 2% or more B: 1.5% or more and less than 2% C: 1% or more and less than 1.5% D: 0.5% or more and less than 1% E: less than 0.5%
〔黒しまり性の評価〕
 得られた加飾フィルムについて、フィルムと垂直方向を0°とした際、45°の角度から視認し、蛍光灯を反射させた際のフィルムの黒さについて、官能評価行った。評価基準を以下に示す。また、評価結果としては、Aが好ましい。
 A:蛍光灯の反射が抑えられている。
 B:蛍光灯が強く映り込み、全体に白っぽく見える。
[Evaluation of black tightness]
The obtained decorative film was visually observed from an angle of 45 ° when the direction perpendicular to the film was 0 °, and the sensory evaluation was performed on the blackness of the film when reflected by a fluorescent lamp. The evaluation criteria are shown below. A is preferred as the evaluation result.
A: The reflection of the fluorescent lamp is suppressed.
B: Fluorescent light is strongly reflected and looks whitish as a whole.
〔耐傷性の評価〕
 得られた加飾フィルムの耐傷性評価は、新東科学(株)製表面性測定機Heidon Type 18Sを用いたスチールウール擦り試験により行った。スチールウール擦り試験は、30mmφの日本スチールウール(株)製ボンスター業務用等級#0000を加飾フィルム表面に押し当て(荷重50g)、揺動ストローク50mm、揺動速度1000mm/分、10往復の条件で行った後に外観を目視評価することにより評価した。評価基準を以下に示す。評価結果としては、Aが好ましい。
  A:傷の本数が20本以下である
  B:傷の本数が20本より多い
[Evaluation of scratch resistance]
The evaluation of the scratch resistance of the obtained decorative film was performed by a steel wool rubbing test using a surface property measuring device Heidon Type 18S manufactured by Shinto Kagaku Co., Ltd. In the steel wool rub test, a 30 mmφ Nippon Steel Wool Co., Ltd. Bonster commercial grade # 0000 was pressed against the surface of the decorative film (load 50 g), swing stroke 50 mm, swing speed 1000 mm / min, 10 reciprocating conditions. And then visually evaluated the appearance. The evaluation criteria are shown below. As the evaluation result, A is preferable.
A: The number of scratches is 20 or less B: The number of scratches is more than 20
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
 なお、表1における略称の詳細は、以下の通りである。
 アクリル1:エトキシ化O-フェニルフェノールアクリレート、又は、その重合体
 アクリル2:日本化薬(株)製PET-30、又は、その重合体
 シロキサン1:MS-51(三菱化学(株)製)の加水分解縮合物
 アクリル4:東亞合成(株)製M-510、又は、その重合体
 アクリル5:東亞合成(株)製M-510、又は、その重合体
 アクリル6:東亞合成(株)製M-510、又は、その重合体
 アクリル7:東亞合成(株)製M-270、又は、その重合体
 アクリル8:(株)日本触媒製エポクロスWS-700
 ウレタン:M-1200、又は、その重合体
 ポリエステル:互応化学工業(株)製プラスコートZ687
 ポリウレタン:DIC(株)製ハイドランHW-350
 ZrO-A:SZR-M
 ZrO-B:SZR-CW
 TiO:HTD-780T
 中空シリカ:日揮触媒化成(株)製スルーリア4110
The details of the abbreviations in Table 1 are as follows.
Acrylic 1: Ethoxylated O-phenylphenol acrylate or a polymer thereof Acrylic 2: PET-30 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. or a polymer thereof Siloxane 1: MS-51 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) Hydrolysis condensate Acrylic 4: M-510 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. or polymer thereof Acrylic 5: M-510 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. or polymer thereof Acrylic 6: M manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. -510 or its polymer Acrylic 7: M-270 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. or its polymer Acrylic 8: Epocross WS-700 manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.
Urethane: M-1200 or a polymer thereof Polyester: Pluscoat Z687 manufactured by Ryogo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
Polyurethane: Hydran HW-350 manufactured by DIC Corporation
ZrO 2 -A: SZR-M
ZrO 2 -B: SZR-CW
TiO 2 : HTD-780T
Hollow silica: Sluria 4110 manufactured by JGC Catalysts & Chemicals, Inc.
 表1に記載の結果より、実施例1~18及び20~22の加飾フィルム、並びに、実施例19の加飾成型フィルムは、比較例1~4の加飾フィルムに比べ、色変化性(意匠性)に優れる。
 また、表1に記載の結果より、実施例1~18及び20~22の加飾フィルム、並びに、実施例19の加飾成型フィルムは、立体成型性、黒しまり性、及び、耐傷性にも優れる。
From the results shown in Table 1, the decorative films of Examples 1 to 18 and 20 to 22 and the decorative molded film of Example 19 had a color change property (comparable to the decorative films of Comparative Examples 1 to 4). Excellent design).
In addition, from the results shown in Table 1, the decorative films of Examples 1 to 18 and 20 to 22 and the decorative molded film of Example 19 also have three-dimensional moldability, black tightness, and scratch resistance. Excellent.
 2018年7月2日に出願された日本国特許出願第2018-126373号の開示は、その全体が参照により本明細書に取り込まれる。
 本明細書に記載された全ての文献、特許出願、及び、技術規格は、個々の文献、特許出願、及び、技術規格が参照により取り込まれることが具体的かつ個々に記された場合と同程度に、本明細書中に参照により取り込まれる。
The disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-126373 filed on Jul. 2, 2018 is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
All publications, patent applications, and technical standards referred to in this specification are to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent application, and technical standard were specifically and individually stated to be incorporated by reference. Incorporated herein by reference.
 10:加飾フィルム、12:粘着層、14:保護フィルム、16:成型用基材、20:積層体、22:仮支持体、24:着色層、26:樹脂層、28:色変化層A、30:色変化層B、40:加飾成型フィルム 10: decorative film, 12: adhesive layer, 14: protective film, 16: base material for molding, 20: laminate, 22: temporary support, 24: colored layer, 26: resin layer, 28: color changing layer A , 30: color change layer B, 40: decorative molded film

Claims (19)

  1.  仮支持体、
     着色層、
     樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含む色変化層A、並びに、
     色変化層Bをこの順に有し、
     前記色変化層Bが、前記色変化層Aよりも屈折率が0.1以上低い層である
     加飾フィルム。
    Temporary support,
    Colored layer,
    A color change layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, and
    Having a color changing layer B in this order,
    The decorative film, wherein the color change layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.1 or more.
  2.  前記着色層が、樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含む請求項1に記載の加飾フィルム。 The decorative film according to claim 1, wherein the colored layer contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound.
  3.  前記着色層の厚みが、3μm以上である請求項1又は請求項2に記載の加飾フィルム。 The decorative film according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the thickness of the coloring layer is 3 µm or more.
  4.  前記着色層が、着色剤として、顔料を含む請求項1~請求項3のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルム。 (4) The decorative film according to any one of (1) to (3), wherein the coloring layer contains a pigment as a coloring agent.
  5.  前記着色層が、ウレタン結合、及び、炭素数2又は3のアルキレンオキシ基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の部分構造を有する2官能又は3官能重合性化合物を少なくとも硬化してなる層である請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルム。 The colored layer is a layer obtained by at least curing a bifunctional or trifunctional polymerizable compound having a urethane bond and at least one partial structure selected from the group consisting of alkyleneoxy groups having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. The decorative film according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
  6.  前記色変化層Bが、前記色変化層Aよりも屈折率が0.25以上低い層である請求項1~請求項5のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルム。 The decorative film according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the color change layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.25 or more.
  7.  前記色変化層Aの屈折率が、1.6以上である請求項1~請求項6のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルム。 The decorative film according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the refractive index of the color change layer A is 1.6 or more.
  8.  前記色変化層Aが、酸化ジルコニウム又は酸化チタンを更に含む請求項1~請求項7のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルム。 The decorative film according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the color change layer A further contains zirconium oxide or titanium oxide.
  9.  前記色変化層Bの屈折率が、1.4以下である請求項1~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルム。 The decorative film according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the refractive index of the color change layer B is 1.4 or less.
  10.  前記色変化層Bが、空隙を有するシロキサン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、及び、中空シリカ粒子よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1つを含む請求項1~請求項9のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルム。 The decoration according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the color change layer B contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a siloxane resin having a void, a fluororesin, and hollow silica particles. the film.
  11.  前記色変化層Aの厚みが5μm以上であるか、又は、前記色変化層Bの厚みが5μm以上である請求項1~請求項10のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルム。 The decorative film according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the thickness of the color changing layer A is 5 μm or more, or the thickness of the color changing layer B is 5 μm or more.
  12.  前記色変化層Aの厚みが5μm以上であり、かつ前記色変化層Bの厚みが1μm以下である請求項1~請求項11のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルム。 The decorative film according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the thickness of the color change layer A is 5 μm or more, and the thickness of the color change layer B is 1 μm or less.
  13.  前記色変化層Aの厚みが1μm以下であり、かつ前記色変化層Bの厚みが5μm以上である請求項1~請求項11のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルム。 The decorative film according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the color-changing layer A has a thickness of 1 μm or less, and the color-changing layer B has a thickness of 5 μm or more.
  14.  成型用加飾フィルムである請求項1~請求項13のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルム。 The decorative film according to any one of claims 1 to 13, which is a decorative film for molding.
  15.  請求項1~請求項14のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルムから前記仮支持体を剥離する工程と、
     前記仮支持体を剥離した前記加飾フィルムを前記着色層側から基材に貼り付ける工程とを含む
     加飾方法。
    A step of peeling the temporary support from the decorative film according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
    Attaching the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled to the substrate from the colored layer side.
  16.  前記仮支持体を剥離した前記加飾フィルムにおける前記仮支持体を剥離した面に粘着層を形成する工程を更に含む請求項15に記載の加飾方法。 16. The decorating method according to claim 15, further comprising: a step of forming an adhesive layer on a surface of the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled off, from which the temporary support has been peeled off.
  17.  前記基材が、成型用基材である、請求項15又は請求項16に記載の加飾方法。 The decorating method according to claim 15 or 16, wherein the substrate is a molding substrate.
  18.  請求項1~請求項14のいずれか1項に記載の加飾フィルムから前記仮支持体を剥離する工程と、
     前記仮支持体を剥離した前記加飾フィルムを前記着色層側から成型用基材に貼り付ける工程と、
     前記加飾フィルムが貼り付いた前記成型用基材を成型する工程とを含む
     加飾成型体の製造方法。
    A step of peeling the temporary support from the decorative film according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
    Affixing the decorative film from which the temporary support has been peeled to a molding substrate from the colored layer side,
    Molding the substrate for molding to which the decorative film has been adhered.
  19.  基材、
     着色層、
     樹脂及び重合性化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含む色変化層A、並びに、
     色変化層Bをこの順に有し、
     前記色変化層Bが、前記色変化層Aよりも屈折率が0.1以上低い層である
     加飾成型フィルム。
    Base material,
    Colored layer,
    A color change layer A containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a resin and a polymerizable compound, and
    Having a color changing layer B in this order,
    The decorative molded film, wherein the color change layer B is a layer having a refractive index lower than that of the color change layer A by 0.1 or more.
PCT/JP2019/025212 2018-07-02 2019-06-25 Decorative film, decoration method, method for producing decorative molded body, and decorative molded film WO2020008960A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020528811A JP7039701B2 (en) 2018-07-02 2019-06-25 Decorative film, decoration method, manufacturing method of decorative molded body, and decorative molded film

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018126373 2018-07-02
JP2018-126373 2018-07-02

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020008960A1 true WO2020008960A1 (en) 2020-01-09

Family

ID=69059605

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/025212 WO2020008960A1 (en) 2018-07-02 2019-06-25 Decorative film, decoration method, method for producing decorative molded body, and decorative molded film

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7039701B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2020008960A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH06171054A (en) * 1992-12-04 1994-06-21 Mazda Motor Corp Coat structure
JP2005324363A (en) * 2004-05-12 2005-11-24 Hitachi Chem Co Ltd Matte coating base material
JP2019085516A (en) * 2017-11-08 2019-06-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Decorative film manufacturing method and decorative molding film manufacturing method

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH06171054A (en) * 1992-12-04 1994-06-21 Mazda Motor Corp Coat structure
JP2005324363A (en) * 2004-05-12 2005-11-24 Hitachi Chem Co Ltd Matte coating base material
JP2019085516A (en) * 2017-11-08 2019-06-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Decorative film manufacturing method and decorative molding film manufacturing method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP7039701B2 (en) 2022-03-22
JPWO2020008960A1 (en) 2021-04-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7039702B2 (en) Decorative film, decoration method, manufacturing method of decorative molded body, and decorative molded film
TWI488747B (en) Optical laminates and optical laminates
TWI586513B (en) A hard coat film laminate for injection molding, a method for producing the same, and a method of manufacturing the injection molded article using the hard coat film laminate
JP6950680B2 (en) Protective film, optical film, laminate, polarizing plate, image display device, and manufacturing method of polarizing plate
JP6825095B2 (en) Anti-glare anti-reflective film, manufacturing method of anti-glare anti-reflective film, polarizing plate, image display device, and self-luminous display device
JP6908588B2 (en) Front plate of in-vehicle liquid crystal display device
TW202107183A (en) Decorative molded body, method for producing decorative molded body, decorative panel, and electronic device
WO2015198762A1 (en) Optical reflective film, method for producing optical reflective film, and optical reflector using same
JP6815306B2 (en) Manufacturing method of decorative film and manufacturing method of decorative molding film
TW202110618A (en) Decorative film, decorative panel and manufacturing method thereof, electronic device, wearable device, and smartphone
TWI751985B (en) Optical film, polarizing film, manufacturing method of polarizing film, and image display device
US20190270291A1 (en) Decorative film and decorative molded body
US10688763B2 (en) Decorative film and decorative molded body
WO2020008960A1 (en) Decorative film, decoration method, method for producing decorative molded body, and decorative molded film
JP6855355B2 (en) Manufacturing method of decorative film
JP7053108B2 (en) Decorative film, molded body, manufacturing method of molded body, decoration method of decorated body, laminated body, manufacturing method of laminated body
JP6917534B2 (en) Laminated film and laminated members
TW201128239A (en) Optical laminate and manufacturing method thereof as well as polarizing plate and display device using the same
JP6651821B2 (en) Method of manufacturing hard coat film, method of manufacturing polarizing plate including hard coat film, method of manufacturing transmission type liquid crystal display including hard coat film
JP7084492B2 (en) Film for molding, molding method, molded product, and curable composition for molding
JP7187990B2 (en) Method for manufacturing resin molding
TWI835262B (en) Optical film, laminate, polarizing plate, image display device and method for manufacturing polarizing plate
JP6520431B2 (en) Hard coat film manufacturing method
JP2017002249A (en) Hard coat film, polarizing plate and transmission type liquid crystal display

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19830998

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020528811

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19830998

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1